diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost')
17 files changed, 5298 insertions, 5298 deletions
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.c index e74d37749..585820d34 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.c +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.c @@ -1,297 +1,297 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Main source file for the BluetoothHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
- * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
- */
-
-#include "BluetoothHost.h"
-
-/** Bluetooth configuration structure. This structure configures the bluetooth stack's user alterable settings. */
-Bluetooth_Device_t Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration =
- {
- Class: (DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_CAPTURING | DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_COMPUTER | DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_PALM),
- PINCode: "0000",
- Name: "LUFA Bluetooth Demo"
- };
-
-/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
- * enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
- */
-int main(void)
-{
- SetupHardware();
-
- puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Bluetooth Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
- sei();
-
- for (;;)
- {
- Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask();
- Bluetooth_Host_Task();
- USB_USBTask();
- }
-}
-
-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
-void SetupHardware(void)
-{
- /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
- MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
- wdt_disable();
-
- /* Disable clock division */
- clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
-
- /* Hardware Initialization */
- SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
- LEDs_Init();
- USB_Init();
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
- * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
-{
- puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
- * stops the library USB task management process.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
-{
- puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
- * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
-{
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
-{
- USB_ShutDown();
-
- printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
- " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
- for(;;);
-}
-
-/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
- * enumerating an attached USB device.
- */
-void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
-{
- printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
- " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
- " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
- " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
-
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
-}
-
-/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated. */
-void Bluetooth_Host_Task(void)
-{
- uint8_t ErrorCode;
-
- switch (USB_HostState)
- {
- case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
- puts_P(PSTR("Getting Device Data.\r\n"));
-
- /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
- if ((ErrorCode = ProcessDeviceDescriptor()) != SuccessfulDeviceRead)
- {
- if (ErrorCode == DevControlError)
- puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Device).\r\n"));
- else
- puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
- printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
- /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
-
- /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
- USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
- break;
- }
-
- puts_P(PSTR("Bluetooth Dongle Detected.\r\n"));
-
- /* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
- if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
- {
- printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
- " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
- /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
-
- /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
- USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
- break;
- }
-
- puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
-
- /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
- if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
- {
- if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
- puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
- else
- puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
-
- printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
-
- /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
- LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
-
- /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
- USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval;
- break;
- }
-
- puts_P(PSTR("Bluetooth Dongle Enumerated.\r\n"));
-
- /* Initialize the Bluetooth stack */
- Bluetooth_Stack_Init();
-
- USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
- break;
- }
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for when the Bluetooth stack has fully initialized using the attached
- * Bluetooth dongle.
- */
-void Bluetooth_StackInitialized(void)
-{
- printf_P(PSTR("Stack initialized with local address %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"),
- Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[5], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[4], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[3],
- Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[2], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[1], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[0]);
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a Bluetooth connection request. When this callback fires, the
- * user application must indicate if the connection is to be allowed or rejected.
- *
- * \param[in] RemoteAddress Bluetooth address of the remote device attempting the connection
- *
- * \return Boolean true to accept the connection, false to reject it
- */
-bool Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(const uint8_t* RemoteAddress)
-{
- printf_P(PSTR("Connection Request from Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"),
- RemoteAddress[5], RemoteAddress[4], RemoteAddress[3], RemoteAddress[2],
- RemoteAddress[1], RemoteAddress[0]);
-
- /* Always accept connections from remote devices */
- return true;
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a completed Bluetooth connection. When this callback is made,
- * the connection information can be accessed through the global \ref Bluetooth_Connection structure.
- */
-void Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete(void)
-{
- printf_P(PSTR("Connection Complete to Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"),
- Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[5], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[4],
- Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[3], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[2],
- Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[1], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[0]);
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a completed Bluetooth disconnection. When this callback is made,
- * the connection information in the global \ref Bluetooth_Connection structure is invalidated with the
- * exception of the RemoteAddress element, which can be used to determine the address of the device that
- * was disconnected.
- */
-void Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete(void)
-{
- printf_P(PSTR("Disconnection Complete to Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"),
- Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[5], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[4],
- Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[3], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[2],
- Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[1], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[0]);
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a Bluetooth ACL Channel connection request. When is callback fires,
- * the user application must indicate if the channel connection should be rejected or not, based on the
- * protocol (PSM) value of the requested channel.
- *
- * \param PSM Protocol PSM value for the requested channel
- *
- * \return Boolean true to accept the channel connection request, false to reject it
- */
-bool Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(const uint16_t PSM)
-{
- /* Always accept channel connection requests regardless of PSM */
- return true;
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a non-signal ACL packet reception. This callback fires once a connection
- * to a remote Bluetooth device has been made, and the remote device has sent a non-signalling ACL packet.
- *
- * \param[in] Data Pointer to a buffer where the received data is stored
- * \param[in] DataLen Length of the packet data, in bytes
- * \param[in] Channel Bluetooth ACL data channel information structure for the packet's destination channel
- */
-void Bluetooth_PacketReceived(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel)
-{
- switch (Channel->PSM)
- {
- case CHANNEL_PSM_SDP:
- /* Service Discovery Protocol packet */
- ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(Data, Channel);
- break;
- default:
- /* Unknown Protocol packet */
- printf_P(PSTR("Packet Received (Channel 0x%04X, PSM: 0x%02x):\r\n"), Channel->LocalNumber, Channel->PSM);
- for (uint16_t Byte = 0; Byte < DataLen; Byte++)
- printf_P(PSTR("0x%02X "), ((uint8_t*)Data)[Byte]);
- puts_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
-
- break;
- }
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the BluetoothHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "BluetoothHost.h" + +/** Bluetooth configuration structure. This structure configures the bluetooth stack's user alterable settings. */ +Bluetooth_Device_t Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration = + { + Class: (DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_CAPTURING | DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_COMPUTER | DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_PALM), + PINCode: "0000", + Name: "LUFA Bluetooth Demo" + }; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Bluetooth Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + sei(); + + for (;;) + { + Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask(); + Bluetooth_Host_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE)); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE)); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n" + " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n" + " -- Error Code %d\r\n" + " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n" + " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated. */ +void Bluetooth_Host_Task(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Device Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessDeviceDescriptor()) != SuccessfulDeviceRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == DevControlError) + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Device).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval; + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Bluetooth Dongle Detected.\r\n")); + + /* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n" + " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval; + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval; + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Bluetooth Dongle Enumerated.\r\n")); + + /* Initialize the Bluetooth stack */ + Bluetooth_Stack_Init(); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + } +} + +/** Bluetooth stack callback event for when the Bluetooth stack has fully initialized using the attached + * Bluetooth dongle. + */ +void Bluetooth_StackInitialized(void) +{ + printf_P(PSTR("Stack initialized with local address %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"), + Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[5], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[4], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[3], + Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[2], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[1], Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR[0]); +} + +/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a Bluetooth connection request. When this callback fires, the + * user application must indicate if the connection is to be allowed or rejected. + * + * \param[in] RemoteAddress Bluetooth address of the remote device attempting the connection + * + * \return Boolean true to accept the connection, false to reject it + */ +bool Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(const uint8_t* RemoteAddress) +{ + printf_P(PSTR("Connection Request from Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"), + RemoteAddress[5], RemoteAddress[4], RemoteAddress[3], RemoteAddress[2], + RemoteAddress[1], RemoteAddress[0]); + + /* Always accept connections from remote devices */ + return true; +} + +/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a completed Bluetooth connection. When this callback is made, + * the connection information can be accessed through the global \ref Bluetooth_Connection structure. + */ +void Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete(void) +{ + printf_P(PSTR("Connection Complete to Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"), + Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[5], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[4], + Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[3], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[2], + Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[1], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[0]); +} + +/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a completed Bluetooth disconnection. When this callback is made, + * the connection information in the global \ref Bluetooth_Connection structure is invalidated with the + * exception of the RemoteAddress element, which can be used to determine the address of the device that + * was disconnected. + */ +void Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete(void) +{ + printf_P(PSTR("Disconnection Complete to Device %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X.\r\n"), + Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[5], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[4], + Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[3], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[2], + Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[1], Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress[0]); +} + +/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a Bluetooth ACL Channel connection request. When is callback fires, + * the user application must indicate if the channel connection should be rejected or not, based on the + * protocol (PSM) value of the requested channel. + * + * \param PSM Protocol PSM value for the requested channel + * + * \return Boolean true to accept the channel connection request, false to reject it + */ +bool Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(const uint16_t PSM) +{ + /* Always accept channel connection requests regardless of PSM */ + return true; +} + +/** Bluetooth stack callback event for a non-signal ACL packet reception. This callback fires once a connection + * to a remote Bluetooth device has been made, and the remote device has sent a non-signalling ACL packet. + * + * \param[in] Data Pointer to a buffer where the received data is stored + * \param[in] DataLen Length of the packet data, in bytes + * \param[in] Channel Bluetooth ACL data channel information structure for the packet's destination channel + */ +void Bluetooth_PacketReceived(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel) +{ + switch (Channel->PSM) + { + case CHANNEL_PSM_SDP: + /* Service Discovery Protocol packet */ + ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(Data, Channel); + break; + default: + /* Unknown Protocol packet */ + printf_P(PSTR("Packet Received (Channel 0x%04X, PSM: 0x%02x):\r\n"), Channel->LocalNumber, Channel->PSM); + for (uint16_t Byte = 0; Byte < DataLen; Byte++) + printf_P(PSTR("0x%02X "), ((uint8_t*)Data)[Byte]); + puts_P(PSTR("\r\n")); + + break; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.h index 8a2817cb7..266181db4 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.h +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/BluetoothHost.h @@ -1,85 +1,85 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for BluetoothHost.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_HOST_H_
-#define _BLUETOOTH_HOST_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <avr/io.h>
- #include <avr/wdt.h>
- #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
- #include <avr/power.h>
- #include <avr/interrupt.h>
- #include <stdio.h>
-
- #include "Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h"
- #include "Lib/BluetoothStack.h"
-
- #include "DeviceDescriptor.h"
- #include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
- #include <LUFA/Version.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
-
- /* Macros: */
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
-
- /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
- #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
-
- /* Task Definitions: */
- void Bluetooth_Host_Task(void);
-
- /* Event Handlers: */
- void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
- void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
- void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void SetupHardware(void);
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BluetoothHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_HOST_H_ +#define _BLUETOOTH_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdio.h> + + #include "Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h" + #include "Lib/BluetoothStack.h" + + #include "DeviceDescriptor.h" + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + #include <LUFA/Version.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /* Task Definitions: */ + void Bluetooth_Host_Task(void); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.c index a69b7b353..db56f462b 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.c +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -1,162 +1,162 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
- * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures
- * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
- */
-
-#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
- * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
- * with compatible devices.
- *
- * This routine searches for a BT interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
- *
- * \return An error code from the \ref BluetoothHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
-{
- uint8_t ConfigDescriptorData[512];
- void* CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
- uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
- uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
-
- /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
- switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
- {
- case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
- break;
- case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
- return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
- case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
- return DescriptorTooLarge;
- default:
- return ControlError;
- }
-
- /* The bluetooth USB transport addendum mandates that the data (not streaming voice) endpoints
- be in the first interface descriptor (interface 0) */
- USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, DTYPE_Interface);
-
- /* Ensure that an interface was found, and the end of the descriptor was not reached */
- if (!(CurrConfigBytesRem))
- return NoBTInterfaceFound;
-
- /* Get the data IN, data OUT and event notification endpoints for the bluetooth interface */
- while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE) |
- (1 << BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE)))
- {
- /* Fetch the next endpoint from the current bluetooth interface */
- if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
- DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint))
- {
- /* Descriptor not found, error out */
- return NoEndpointFound;
- }
-
- USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
-
- /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk or interrupt type endpoint */
- if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
- {
- if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
- {
- /* Configure the events IN pipe */
- Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
- EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
- PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
- Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
-
- /* Set the flag indicating that the events notification pipe has been found */
- FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE);
- }
- }
- else
- {
- if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
- {
- /* Configure the data IN pipe */
- Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
- EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
- PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
- /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
- FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE);
- }
- else
- {
- /* Configure the data OUT pipe */
- Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
- EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
- PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
-
- /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
- FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
- }
- }
-
- }
-
- /* Valid data found, return success */
- return SuccessfulConfigRead;
-}
-
-/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
- * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
- * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
- *
- * This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, aborting the
- * search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
- *
- * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
-{
- /* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
- if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
- {
- /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
- return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
- }
- else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
- {
- /* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
- return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
- }
-
- /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
- return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
-}
-
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a BT interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints. + * + * \return An error code from the \ref BluetoothHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t ConfigDescriptorData[512]; + void* CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem; + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData))) + { + case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful: + break; + case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData: + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow: + return DescriptorTooLarge; + default: + return ControlError; + } + + /* The bluetooth USB transport addendum mandates that the data (not streaming voice) endpoints + be in the first interface descriptor (interface 0) */ + USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, DTYPE_Interface); + + /* Ensure that an interface was found, and the end of the descriptor was not reached */ + if (!(CurrConfigBytesRem)) + return NoBTInterfaceFound; + + /* Get the data IN, data OUT and event notification endpoints for the bluetooth interface */ + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE) | + (1 << BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE))) + { + /* Fetch the next endpoint from the current bluetooth interface */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, + DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk or interrupt type endpoint */ + if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT) + { + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the events IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the events notification pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE); + } + } + else + { + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE); + } + else + { + /* Configure the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + } + } + + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, aborting the + * search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + /* Determine the type of the current descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail; + } + + /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.h index a54727d48..3b5b3adff 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.h +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -1,63 +1,63 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
- #include "BluetoothHost.h"
-
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
- enum BluetoothHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
- {
- SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
- DevControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
- DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
- InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
- NoBTInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible Blutooth interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
- NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible set of Bluetooth endpoints were not found in the
- * device's Bluetooth interface
- */
- };
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
-
- uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "BluetoothHost.h" + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum BluetoothHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + DevControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoBTInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible Blutooth interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible set of Bluetooth endpoints were not found in the + * device's Bluetooth interface + */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + + uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBluetoothDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.c index 65d5b3311..22a9c3506 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.c +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.c @@ -1,67 +1,67 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * USB Device Descriptor processing routines, to determine the overall device parameters. Descriptors are special
- * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine information about
- * the attached device.
- */
-
-#include "DeviceDescriptor.h"
-
-/** Reads and processes an attached device's Device Descriptor, to determine compatibility
- *
- * This routine checks to ensure that the attached device's class codes match those for Bluetooth devices.
- *
- * \return An error code from the \ref BluetoothHost_GetDeviceDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
- */
-uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void)
-{
- USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor;
-
- /* Send the request to retrieve the device descriptor */
- if (USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(&DeviceDescriptor) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
- return DevControlError;
-
- /* Validate returned data - ensure the returned data is a device descriptor */
- if (DeviceDescriptor.Header.Type != DTYPE_Device)
- return InvalidDeviceDataReturned;
-
- /* Validate returned device Class, SubClass and Protocol values against the Bluetooth spec values */
- if ((DeviceDescriptor.Class != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_CLASS) ||
- (DeviceDescriptor.SubClass != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SUBCLASS) ||
- (DeviceDescriptor.Protocol != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_PROTOCOL))
- {
- return IncorrectBTDevice;
- }
-
- return SuccessfulDeviceRead;
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptor processing routines, to determine the overall device parameters. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine information about + * the attached device. + */ + +#include "DeviceDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's Device Descriptor, to determine compatibility + * + * This routine checks to ensure that the attached device's class codes match those for Bluetooth devices. + * + * \return An error code from the \ref BluetoothHost_GetDeviceDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void) +{ + USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor; + + /* Send the request to retrieve the device descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(&DeviceDescriptor) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return DevControlError; + + /* Validate returned data - ensure the returned data is a device descriptor */ + if (DeviceDescriptor.Header.Type != DTYPE_Device) + return InvalidDeviceDataReturned; + + /* Validate returned device Class, SubClass and Protocol values against the Bluetooth spec values */ + if ((DeviceDescriptor.Class != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_CLASS) || + (DeviceDescriptor.SubClass != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SUBCLASS) || + (DeviceDescriptor.Protocol != BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return IncorrectBTDevice; + } + + return SuccessfulDeviceRead; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.h index a87085a3a..5dee7d996 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.h +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/DeviceDescriptor.h @@ -1,66 +1,66 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/** \file
- *
- * Header file for DeviceDescriptor.c.
- */
-
-#ifndef _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_
-#define _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
- #include "BluetoothHost.h"
-
- /* Macros: */
- /** Device Class value for the Bluetooth Device class */
- #define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_CLASS 0xE0
-
- /** Device Subclass value for the Bluetooth Device class */
- #define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SUBCLASS 0x01
-
- /** Device Protocol value for the Bluetooth Device class */
- #define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_PROTOCOL 0x01
-
- /* Enums: */
- enum BluetoothHost_GetDeviceDescriptorDataCodes_t
- {
- SuccessfulDeviceRead = 0, /**< Device Descriptor was processed successfully */
- ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
- InvalidDeviceDataReturned = 2, /**< The device returned an invalid Device Descriptor */
- IncorrectBTDevice = 3, /**< The attached device is not a Bluetooth class device */
- };
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void);
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DeviceDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "BluetoothHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Device Class value for the Bluetooth Device class */ + #define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_CLASS 0xE0 + + /** Device Subclass value for the Bluetooth Device class */ + #define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_SUBCLASS 0x01 + + /** Device Protocol value for the Bluetooth Device class */ + #define BLUETOOTH_DEVICE_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /* Enums: */ + enum BluetoothHost_GetDeviceDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulDeviceRead = 0, /**< Device Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + InvalidDeviceDataReturned = 2, /**< The device returned an invalid Device Descriptor */ + IncorrectBTDevice = 3, /**< The attached device is not a Bluetooth class device */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Doxygen.conf index 582164a8f..6d0a2f6c0 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Doxygen.conf +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@ -# Doxyfile 1.6.2
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-# TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-# TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Bluetooth Host Demo"
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
- "The $name widget" \
- "The $name file" \
- is \
- provides \
- specifies \
- contains \
- represents \
- a \
- an \
- the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH =
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES = YES
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES =
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
-# scopes will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
-# Fortran.
-
-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
-# VHDL.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
-
-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
-
-EXTENSION_MAPPING =
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT = NO
-
-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
-
-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
-
-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
-# causing a significant performance penality.
-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
-
-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
-# the interface are included in the documentation.
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
-# anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
-
-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
-# rather than with sharp brackets.
-
-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
-
-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
-
-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
-# the group names will appear in their defined order.
-
-SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
-# not including the namespace part.
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS =
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_FILES = YES
-
-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
-# Namespaces page.
-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
-
-SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
-
-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
-# of the layout file.
-
-LAYOUT_FILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET = YES
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT = ./
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
-# the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank the following patterns are tested:
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
- *.c \
- *.txt
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE = YES
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE = Documentation/
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS =
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \
- INCLUDE_FROM_*
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH =
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH =
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
-# to standard output.
-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER =
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
-# basis.
-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
-# filter if there is a match.
-# The filters are a list of the form:
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS =
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
-# then for each documented function all documented entities
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.
-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER =
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER =
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET =
-
-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
-
-HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
-# it at startup.
-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
-
-GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
-# can be grouped.
-
-DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
-
-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
-# will append .docset to the name.
-
-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
-# content.
-
-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
-# HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_QHP = NO
-
-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
-
-QCH_FILE =
-
-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
-
-QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
-
-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
-
-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
-# For more information please see
-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME =
-
-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
-
-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS =
-
-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
-# filter section matches.
-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
-
-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS =
-
-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
-# .qhp file.
-
-QHG_LOCATION =
-
-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
-# will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
-# plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
-
-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO
-
-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
-# this name.
-
-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
-
-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
-
-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
-
-USE_INLINE_TREES = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
-
-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
-# to force them to be regenerated.
-
-FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
-
-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
-
-SEARCHENGINE = NO
-
-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
-# and does not have live searching capabilities.
-
-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES =
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER =
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX = YES
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
-
-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
-
-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
-# programs which support those fields.
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA =
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD =
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
-# that captures the structure of the code including all
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
-# This is useful
-# if you want to understand what is going on.
-# On the other hand, if this
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH =
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
-# this location is as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
-#
-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES =
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE =
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
-# default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH =
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT = NO
-
-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
-# containing the font.
-
-DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
-
-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
-# The default size is 10pt.
-
-DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
-
-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
-# can find it using this tag.
-
-DOT_FONTPATH =
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH =
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS =
-
-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+# Doxyfile 1.6.2 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Bluetooth Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, +# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English +# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, +# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, +# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses. +# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension. +# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag. +# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of +# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP, +# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat +# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran), +# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation +# rather than with sharp brackets. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. +# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter> +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. +# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. +# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. +# The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. +# Otherwise they will link to the documentation. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting +# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add. +# For more information please see +# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see +# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's +# filter section matches. +# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help +# plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents +# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML +# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of +# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as +# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have +# this name. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser). +# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list. + +USE_INLINE_TREES = NO + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript +# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should +# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine +# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index +# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup +# and does not have live searching capabilities. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for +# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the +# Makefile that is written to the output directory. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. +# This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. +# On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c index 7c03a64cc..160aa3ac8 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c @@ -1,756 +1,756 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/*
- TODO: Make SendPacket respect receiver's MTU
- TODO: Make ReceivePacket stitch together MTU fragments (?)
- TODO: Add channel opened/closed callbacks
- */
-
-#define INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_C
-#include "BluetoothACLPackets.h"
-
-/** Bluetooth ACL processing task. This task should be called repeatedly the main Bluetooth
- * stack task to manage the ACL processing state.
- */
-void Bluetooth_ACLTask(void)
-{
- /* Process incomming ACL packets, if any */
- Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets();
-
- /* Check for any half-open channels, send configuration details to the remote device if found */
- for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
- {
- Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
-
- bool MustSendConfigReq = true;
-
- /* Check if we are in a channel state which requires a configuration request to be sent */
- switch (ChannelData->State)
- {
- case Channel_Config_WaitConfig:
- ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitReqResp;
- break;
- case Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig:
- ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitResp;
- break;
- default:
- MustSendConfigReq = false;
- break;
- }
-
- /* Only send a configuration request if it the channel was in a state which required it */
- if (MustSendConfigReq)
- {
- struct
- {
- BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
- BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t ConfigurationRequest;
-
- struct
- {
- BT_Config_Option_Header_t Header;
- uint16_t Value;
- } Option_LocalMTU;
- } PacketData;
-
- /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
- PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST;
- PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier;
- PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(PacketData.ConfigurationRequest) +
- sizeof(PacketData.Option_LocalMTU);
-
- /* Fill out the Configuration Request in the response packet, including local MTU information */
- PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
- PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.Flags = 0;
- PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Header.Type = BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU;
- PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Header.Length = sizeof(PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Value);
- PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Value = ChannelData->LocalMTU;
-
- Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL);
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Configuration Request");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel);
- }
- }
-}
-
-/** Incomming ACL packet processing task. This task is called by the main ACL processing task to read in and process
- * any incomming ACL packets to the device, handling signal requests as they are received or passing along channel
- * data to the user application.
- */
-static void Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets(void)
-{
- BT_ACL_Header_t ACLPacketHeader;
- BT_DataPacket_Header_t DataHeader;
-
- Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE);
- Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
- if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
- {
- Pipe_Freeze();
- return;
- }
-
- /* Read in the received ACL packet headers when it has been discovered that a packet has been received */
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ACLPacketHeader, sizeof(ACLPacketHeader));
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DataHeader, sizeof(DataHeader));
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "Packet Received");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection Handle: 0x%04X", (ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle & 0x0FFF));
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Data Length: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader.DataLength);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DataHeader.DestinationChannel);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Payload Length: 0x%04X", DataHeader.PayloadLength);
-
- /* Check the packet's destination channel - signalling channel should be processed by the stack internally */
- if (DataHeader.DestinationChannel == BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING)
- {
- /* Read in the Signal Command header of the incomming packet */
- BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&SignalCommandHeader, sizeof(SignalCommandHeader));
-
- /* Dispatch to the appropriate handler function based on the Signal message code */
- switch (SignalCommandHeader.Code)
- {
- case BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST:
- Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
- break;
- case BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE:
- Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(&SignalCommandHeader);
- break;
- case BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST:
- Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
- break;
- case BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE:
- Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(&SignalCommandHeader);
- break;
- case BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST:
- Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
- break;
- case BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE:
- Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(&SignalCommandHeader);
- break;
- case BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_REQUEST:
- Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
- break;
- case BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_REQUEST:
- Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(&SignalCommandHeader);
- break;
- case BT_SIGNAL_COMMAND_REJECT:
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Reject");
-
- uint16_t RejectReason;
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&RejectReason, sizeof(RejectReason));
- Pipe_Discard_Stream(ACLPacketHeader.DataLength - sizeof(RejectReason));
- Pipe_ClearIN();
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Reason: %d", RejectReason);
- break;
- default:
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< Unknown Signaling Command 0x%02X", SignalCommandHeader.Code);
-
- Pipe_Discard_Stream(ACLPacketHeader.DataLength);
- Pipe_ClearIN();
- Pipe_Freeze();
- break;
- }
- }
- else
- {
- /* Non-signalling packet received, read in the packet contents and pass to the user application */
- uint8_t PacketData[DataHeader.PayloadLength];
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PacketData, DataHeader.PayloadLength);
- Pipe_ClearIN();
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- Bluetooth_PacketReceived(PacketData, DataHeader.PayloadLength,
- Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DataHeader.DestinationChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER));
- }
-}
-
-/** Sends a packet to the remote device on the specified channel.
- *
- * \param[in] Data Pointer to a buffer where the data is to be sourced from
- * \param[in] DataLen Length of the data to send
- * \param[in] Channel Channel information structure containing the destination channel's information, NULL to send
- * to the remote device's signalling channel
- *
- * \return A value from the \ref BT_SendPacket_ErrorCodes_t enum
- */
-uint8_t Bluetooth_SendPacket(void* Data, const uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel)
-{
- BT_ACL_Header_t ACLPacketHeader;
- BT_DataPacket_Header_t DataHeader;
-
- /* A remote device must be connected before a packet transmission is attempted */
- if (!(Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected))
- return BT_SENDPACKET_NotConnected;
-
- /* If the destination channel is not the signalling channel and it is not currently fully open, abort */
- if ((Channel != NULL) && (Channel->State != Channel_Open))
- return BT_SENDPACKET_ChannelNotOpen;
-
- /* Fill out the packet's header from the remote device connection information structure */
- ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle = (Bluetooth_Connection.ConnectionHandle | BT_ACL_FIRST_AUTOFLUSH);
- ACLPacketHeader.DataLength = sizeof(DataHeader) + DataLen;
- DataHeader.PayloadLength = DataLen;
- DataHeader.DestinationChannel = (Channel == NULL) ? BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING : Channel->RemoteNumber;
-
- Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
- Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
- /* Write the packet contents to the pipe so that it can be sent to the remote device */
- Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&ACLPacketHeader, sizeof(ACLPacketHeader));
- Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&DataHeader, sizeof(DataHeader));
- Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Data, DataLen);
- Pipe_ClearOUT();
-
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "Packet Sent");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection Handle: 0x%04X", (ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle & 0x0FFF));
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Data Length: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader.DataLength);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DataHeader.DestinationChannel);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Payload Length: 0x%04X", DataHeader.PayloadLength);
-
- return BT_SENDPACKET_NoError;
-}
-
-/** Opens a bluetooth channel to the currently connected remote device, so that data can be exchanged.
- *
- * \note The channel is not immediately opened when this function returns - it must undergo a two way
- * connection and configuration process first as the main Bluetooth stack processing task is
- * repeatedly called. The returned channel is unusable by the user application until its State
- * element has progressed to the Open state.
- *
- * \param[in] PSM PSM of the service that the channel is to be opened for
- *
- * \return Pointer to the channel information structure of the opened channel, or NULL if no free channels
- */
-Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_OpenChannel(const uint16_t PSM)
-{
- Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = NULL;
-
- /* Search through the channel information list for a free channel item */
- for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
- {
- if (Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i].State == Channel_Closed)
- {
- ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
-
- /* Set the new channel structure's local channel number to a unique value within the connection orientated
- channel address space */
- ChannelData->LocalNumber = (BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET + i);
- break;
- }
- }
-
- /* If no free channel item was found in the list, all channels are occupied - abort */
- if (ChannelData == NULL)
- return NULL;
-
- /* Reset and fill out the allocated channel's information structure with defaults */
- ChannelData->RemoteNumber = 0;
- ChannelData->PSM = PSM;
- ChannelData->LocalMTU = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU;
- ChannelData->State = Channel_WaitConnectRsp;
-
- struct
- {
- BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
- BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t ConnectionRequest;
- } PacketData;
-
- /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
- PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST;
- PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier;
- PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(PacketData.ConnectionRequest);
-
- /* Fill out the Connection Request in the response packet */
- PacketData.ConnectionRequest.PSM = PSM;
- PacketData.ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel = ChannelData->LocalNumber;
-
- Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL);
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Connection Request");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- PSM 0x%04X", PacketData.ConnectionRequest.PSM);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel);
-
- return ChannelData;
-}
-
-/** Closes a bluetooth channel that is open to the currently connected remote device, so that no further data
- * can be exchanged.
- *
- * \note The channel is not immediately closed when this function returns - it must undergo an asynchronous
- * disconnection process first as the main Bluetooth stack processing task is repeatedly called. The
- * returned channel is unusable by the user application upon return however the channel is not completely
- * closed until its State element has progressed to the Closed state.
- *
- * \param[in,out] Channel Channel information structure of the channel to close
- */
-void Bluetooth_CloseChannel(Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel)
-{
- /* Don't try to close a non-existing or already closed channel */
- if ((Channel == NULL) || (Channel->State == Channel_Closed))
- return;
-
- /* Set the channel's state to the start of the teardown process */
- Channel->State = Channel_WaitDisconnect;
-
- struct
- {
- BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
- BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t DisconnectionRequest;
- } PacketData;
-
- /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
- PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST;
- PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier;
- PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(PacketData.DisconnectionRequest);
-
- /* Fill out the Disconnection Request in the response packet */
- PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel = Channel->RemoteNumber;
- PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel = Channel->LocalNumber;
-
- Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL);
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Disconnection Request");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel);
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Connection Request command.
- *
- * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
- BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t ConnectionRequest;
-
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConnectionRequest, sizeof(ConnectionRequest));
-
- Pipe_ClearIN();
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Connection Request");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- PSM: 0x%04X", ConnectionRequest.PSM);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel);
-
- /* Try to retrieve the existing channel's information structure if it exists */
- Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
-
- /* If an existing channel item with the correct remote channel number was not found, find a free channel entry */
- if (ChannelData == NULL)
- {
- /* Look through the channel information list for a free entry */
- for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
- {
- if (Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i].State == Channel_Closed)
- {
- ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
-
- /* Set the new channel structure's local channel number to a unique value within the connection orientated
- channel address space */
- ChannelData->LocalNumber = (BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET + i);
- break;
- }
- }
- }
-
- uint8_t ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_RESOURCES;
-
- /* Reset the channel item contents only if a channel entry was found for it */
- if (ChannelData != NULL)
- {
- /* Check if the user application will allow the connection based on its PSM */
- if (Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(ConnectionRequest.PSM))
- {
- ChannelData->RemoteNumber = ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel;
- ChannelData->PSM = ConnectionRequest.PSM;
- ChannelData->LocalMTU = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU;
- ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitConfig;
-
- ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL;
- }
- else
- {
- ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_PSM;
- }
- }
-
- struct
- {
- BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
- BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t ConnectionResponse;
- } ResponsePacket;
-
- /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE;
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse);
-
- /* Fill out the Connection Response in the response packet */
- ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->LocalNumber;
- ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
- ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Result = ChannelStatus;
- ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Status = 0x00;
-
- Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Connection Response");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Result);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel);
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Connection Response command.
- *
- * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
- BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t ConnectionResponse;
-
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConnectionResponse, sizeof(ConnectionResponse));
-
- Pipe_ClearIN();
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Connection Response");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ConnectionResponse.Result);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);
-
- /* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
- Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER);
-
- /* Only progress if the referenced channel data was found */
- if (ChannelData != NULL)
- {
- /* Set the channel structure's remote channel number to the channel allocated on the remote device */
- ChannelData->RemoteNumber = ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel;
- ChannelData->State = (ConnectionResponse.Result == BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL) ?
- Channel_Config_WaitConfig : Channel_Closed;
- }
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Configuration Request command.
- *
- * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
- BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t ConfigurationRequest;
-
- /* Allocate a buffer large enough to hold the variable number of configuration options in the request */
- uint8_t OptionsLen = (SignalCommandHeader->Length - sizeof(ConfigurationRequest));
- uint8_t Options[OptionsLen];
-
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConfigurationRequest, sizeof(ConfigurationRequest));
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&Options, sizeof(Options));
-
- Pipe_ClearIN();
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- /* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
- Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER);
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Configuration Request");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Remote MTU: 0x%04X", ChannelData->RemoteMTU);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Options Len: 0x%04X", OptionsLen);
-
- /* Only look at the channel configuration options if a valid channel entry for the local channel number was found */
- if (ChannelData != NULL)
- {
- /* Iterate through each option in the configuration request to look for ones which can be processed */
- uint8_t OptionPos = 0;
- while (OptionPos < OptionsLen)
- {
- BT_Config_Option_Header_t* OptionHeader = (BT_Config_Option_Header_t*)&Options[OptionPos];
- void* OptionData = &Options[OptionPos + sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t)];
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Option Type: 0x%04X", OptionHeader->Type);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Option Length: 0x%04X", (sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t) + OptionHeader->Length));
-
- /* Store the remote MTU option's value if present */
- if (OptionHeader->Type == BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU)
- ChannelData->RemoteMTU = *((uint16_t*)OptionData);
-
- /* Progress to the next option in the packet */
- OptionPos += (sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t) + OptionHeader->Length);
- }
- }
-
- struct
- {
- BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
- BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t ConfigurationResponse;
- } ResponsePacket;
-
- /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE;
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse);
-
- /* Fill out the Configuration Response in the response packet */
- ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
- ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Flags = 0x00;
- ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Result = (ChannelData != NULL) ? BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL : BT_CONFIGURATION_REJECTED;
-
- Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
-
- if (ChannelData != NULL)
- {
- switch (ChannelData->State)
- {
- case Channel_Config_WaitConfig:
- ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig;
- break;
- case Channel_Config_WaitReqResp:
- ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitResp;
- break;
- case Channel_Config_WaitReq:
- ChannelData->State = Channel_Open;
- break;
- }
- }
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Configuration Response");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Result);
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Configuration Response command.
- *
- * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
- BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t ConfigurationResponse;
-
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConfigurationResponse, sizeof(ConfigurationResponse));
-
- Pipe_ClearIN();
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Configuration Response");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ConfigurationResponse.Result);
-
- /* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
- Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
-
- /* Only update the channel's state if it was found in the channel list */
- if (ChannelData != NULL)
- {
- /* Check if the channel configuration completed successfuly */
- if (ConfigurationResponse.Result == BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL)
- {
- switch (ChannelData->State)
- {
- case Channel_Config_WaitReqResp:
- ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitReq;
- break;
- case Channel_Config_WaitResp:
- ChannelData->State = Channel_Open;
- break;
- }
- }
- else
- {
- /* Configuration failed - close the channel */
- ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed;
- }
- }
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Disconnection Request command.
- *
- * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
- BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t DisconnectionRequest;
-
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DisconnectionRequest, sizeof(DisconnectionRequest));
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Disconnection Request");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel);
-
- Pipe_ClearIN();
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- /* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
- Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
-
- struct
- {
- BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
- BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t DisconnectionResponse;
- } ResponsePacket;
-
- /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE;
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse);
-
- /* Fill out the Disconnection Response in the response packet */
- ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber;
- ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel = ChannelData->LocalNumber;
-
- Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
-
- /* If the channel was found in the channel list, close it */
- if (ChannelData != NULL)
- ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed;
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Disconnection Response");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Disconnection Response command.
- *
- * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
- BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t DisconnectionResponse;
-
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DisconnectionResponse, sizeof(DisconnectionResponse));
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Disconnection Response");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel);
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel);
-
- Pipe_ClearIN();
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- /* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */
- Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER);
-
- /* If the channel was found in the channel list, close it */
- if (ChannelData != NULL)
- ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed;
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for an Echo Request command.
- *
- * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Echo Request");
-
- Pipe_ClearIN();
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- struct
- {
- BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
- } ResponsePacket;
-
- /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_RESPONSE;
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length = 0;
-
- Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL);
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Echo Response");
-}
-
-/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for an Information Request command.
- *
- * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header
- */
-static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader)
-{
- BT_Signal_InformationReq_t InformationRequest;
-
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&InformationRequest, sizeof(InformationRequest));
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Information Request");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Info Type: 0x%04X", InformationRequest.InfoType);
-
- Pipe_ClearIN();
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- struct
- {
- BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader;
- BT_Signal_InformationResp_t InformationResponse;
-
- uint8_t Data[4];
- } ResponsePacket;
-
- uint8_t DataLen = 0;
-
- /* Retrieve the requested information and store it in the outgoing packet, if found */
- switch (InformationRequest.InfoType)
- {
- case BT_INFOREQ_MTU:
- ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL;
- DataLen = 2;
-
- *((uint16_t*)&ResponsePacket.Data) = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU;
- break;
- case BT_INFOREQ_EXTENDEDFEATURES:
- ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL;
- DataLen = 4;
-
- *((uint32_t*)&ResponsePacket.Data) = 0;
- break;
- default:
- ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_NOTSUPPORTED;
- DataLen = 0;
- break;
- }
-
- /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_RESPONSE;
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier;
- ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(ResponsePacket.InformationResponse) + DataLen;
-
- /* Fill out the Information Response in the response packet */
- ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.InfoType = InformationRequest.InfoType;
-
- Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, (sizeof(ResponsePacket) - sizeof(ResponsePacket.Data) + DataLen), NULL);
-
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Information Response");
- BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result);
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + TODO: Make SendPacket respect receiver's MTU + TODO: Make ReceivePacket stitch together MTU fragments (?) + TODO: Add channel opened/closed callbacks + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_C +#include "BluetoothACLPackets.h" + +/** Bluetooth ACL processing task. This task should be called repeatedly the main Bluetooth + * stack task to manage the ACL processing state. + */ +void Bluetooth_ACLTask(void) +{ + /* Process incomming ACL packets, if any */ + Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets(); + + /* Check for any half-open channels, send configuration details to the remote device if found */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++) + { + Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i]; + + bool MustSendConfigReq = true; + + /* Check if we are in a channel state which requires a configuration request to be sent */ + switch (ChannelData->State) + { + case Channel_Config_WaitConfig: + ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitReqResp; + break; + case Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig: + ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitResp; + break; + default: + MustSendConfigReq = false; + break; + } + + /* Only send a configuration request if it the channel was in a state which required it */ + if (MustSendConfigReq) + { + struct + { + BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader; + BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t ConfigurationRequest; + + struct + { + BT_Config_Option_Header_t Header; + uint16_t Value; + } Option_LocalMTU; + } PacketData; + + /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */ + PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST; + PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier; + PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(PacketData.ConfigurationRequest) + + sizeof(PacketData.Option_LocalMTU); + + /* Fill out the Configuration Request in the response packet, including local MTU information */ + PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber; + PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.Flags = 0; + PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Header.Type = BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU; + PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Header.Length = sizeof(PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Value); + PacketData.Option_LocalMTU.Value = ChannelData->LocalMTU; + + Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Configuration Request"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel); + } + } +} + +/** Incomming ACL packet processing task. This task is called by the main ACL processing task to read in and process + * any incomming ACL packets to the device, handling signal requests as they are received or passing along channel + * data to the user application. + */ +static void Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets(void) +{ + BT_ACL_Header_t ACLPacketHeader; + BT_DataPacket_Header_t DataHeader; + + Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return; + } + + /* Read in the received ACL packet headers when it has been discovered that a packet has been received */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ACLPacketHeader, sizeof(ACLPacketHeader)); + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DataHeader, sizeof(DataHeader)); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, ""); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "Packet Received"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection Handle: 0x%04X", (ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle & 0x0FFF)); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Data Length: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader.DataLength); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DataHeader.DestinationChannel); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Payload Length: 0x%04X", DataHeader.PayloadLength); + + /* Check the packet's destination channel - signalling channel should be processed by the stack internally */ + if (DataHeader.DestinationChannel == BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING) + { + /* Read in the Signal Command header of the incomming packet */ + BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader; + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&SignalCommandHeader, sizeof(SignalCommandHeader)); + + /* Dispatch to the appropriate handler function based on the Signal message code */ + switch (SignalCommandHeader.Code) + { + case BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST: + Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(&SignalCommandHeader); + break; + case BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE: + Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(&SignalCommandHeader); + break; + case BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST: + Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(&SignalCommandHeader); + break; + case BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE: + Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(&SignalCommandHeader); + break; + case BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST: + Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(&SignalCommandHeader); + break; + case BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE: + Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(&SignalCommandHeader); + break; + case BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_REQUEST: + Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(&SignalCommandHeader); + break; + case BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_REQUEST: + Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(&SignalCommandHeader); + break; + case BT_SIGNAL_COMMAND_REJECT: + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Reject"); + + uint16_t RejectReason; + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&RejectReason, sizeof(RejectReason)); + Pipe_Discard_Stream(ACLPacketHeader.DataLength - sizeof(RejectReason)); + Pipe_ClearIN(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Reason: %d", RejectReason); + break; + default: + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< Unknown Signaling Command 0x%02X", SignalCommandHeader.Code); + + Pipe_Discard_Stream(ACLPacketHeader.DataLength); + Pipe_ClearIN(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } + } + else + { + /* Non-signalling packet received, read in the packet contents and pass to the user application */ + uint8_t PacketData[DataHeader.PayloadLength]; + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PacketData, DataHeader.PayloadLength); + Pipe_ClearIN(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + Bluetooth_PacketReceived(PacketData, DataHeader.PayloadLength, + Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DataHeader.DestinationChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER)); + } +} + +/** Sends a packet to the remote device on the specified channel. + * + * \param[in] Data Pointer to a buffer where the data is to be sourced from + * \param[in] DataLen Length of the data to send + * \param[in] Channel Channel information structure containing the destination channel's information, NULL to send + * to the remote device's signalling channel + * + * \return A value from the \ref BT_SendPacket_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t Bluetooth_SendPacket(void* Data, const uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel) +{ + BT_ACL_Header_t ACLPacketHeader; + BT_DataPacket_Header_t DataHeader; + + /* A remote device must be connected before a packet transmission is attempted */ + if (!(Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected)) + return BT_SENDPACKET_NotConnected; + + /* If the destination channel is not the signalling channel and it is not currently fully open, abort */ + if ((Channel != NULL) && (Channel->State != Channel_Open)) + return BT_SENDPACKET_ChannelNotOpen; + + /* Fill out the packet's header from the remote device connection information structure */ + ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle = (Bluetooth_Connection.ConnectionHandle | BT_ACL_FIRST_AUTOFLUSH); + ACLPacketHeader.DataLength = sizeof(DataHeader) + DataLen; + DataHeader.PayloadLength = DataLen; + DataHeader.DestinationChannel = (Channel == NULL) ? BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING : Channel->RemoteNumber; + + Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the packet contents to the pipe so that it can be sent to the remote device */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&ACLPacketHeader, sizeof(ACLPacketHeader)); + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&DataHeader, sizeof(DataHeader)); + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Data, DataLen); + Pipe_ClearOUT(); + + Pipe_Freeze(); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, ""); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "Packet Sent"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection Handle: 0x%04X", (ACLPacketHeader.ConnectionHandle & 0x0FFF)); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Data Length: 0x%04X", ACLPacketHeader.DataLength); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DataHeader.DestinationChannel); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Payload Length: 0x%04X", DataHeader.PayloadLength); + + return BT_SENDPACKET_NoError; +} + +/** Opens a bluetooth channel to the currently connected remote device, so that data can be exchanged. + * + * \note The channel is not immediately opened when this function returns - it must undergo a two way + * connection and configuration process first as the main Bluetooth stack processing task is + * repeatedly called. The returned channel is unusable by the user application until its State + * element has progressed to the Open state. + * + * \param[in] PSM PSM of the service that the channel is to be opened for + * + * \return Pointer to the channel information structure of the opened channel, or NULL if no free channels + */ +Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_OpenChannel(const uint16_t PSM) +{ + Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = NULL; + + /* Search through the channel information list for a free channel item */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++) + { + if (Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i].State == Channel_Closed) + { + ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i]; + + /* Set the new channel structure's local channel number to a unique value within the connection orientated + channel address space */ + ChannelData->LocalNumber = (BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET + i); + break; + } + } + + /* If no free channel item was found in the list, all channels are occupied - abort */ + if (ChannelData == NULL) + return NULL; + + /* Reset and fill out the allocated channel's information structure with defaults */ + ChannelData->RemoteNumber = 0; + ChannelData->PSM = PSM; + ChannelData->LocalMTU = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU; + ChannelData->State = Channel_WaitConnectRsp; + + struct + { + BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader; + BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t ConnectionRequest; + } PacketData; + + /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */ + PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST; + PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier; + PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(PacketData.ConnectionRequest); + + /* Fill out the Connection Request in the response packet */ + PacketData.ConnectionRequest.PSM = PSM; + PacketData.ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel = ChannelData->LocalNumber; + + Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Connection Request"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- PSM 0x%04X", PacketData.ConnectionRequest.PSM); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel); + + return ChannelData; +} + +/** Closes a bluetooth channel that is open to the currently connected remote device, so that no further data + * can be exchanged. + * + * \note The channel is not immediately closed when this function returns - it must undergo an asynchronous + * disconnection process first as the main Bluetooth stack processing task is repeatedly called. The + * returned channel is unusable by the user application upon return however the channel is not completely + * closed until its State element has progressed to the Closed state. + * + * \param[in,out] Channel Channel information structure of the channel to close + */ +void Bluetooth_CloseChannel(Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel) +{ + /* Don't try to close a non-existing or already closed channel */ + if ((Channel == NULL) || (Channel->State == Channel_Closed)) + return; + + /* Set the channel's state to the start of the teardown process */ + Channel->State = Channel_WaitDisconnect; + + struct + { + BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader; + BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t DisconnectionRequest; + } PacketData; + + /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */ + PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST; + PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = ++Bluetooth_Connection.SignallingIdentifier; + PacketData.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(PacketData.DisconnectionRequest); + + /* Fill out the Disconnection Request in the response packet */ + PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel = Channel->RemoteNumber; + PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel = Channel->LocalNumber; + + Bluetooth_SendPacket(&PacketData, sizeof(PacketData), NULL); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Disconnection Request"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", PacketData.DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel); +} + +/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Connection Request command. + * + * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header + */ +static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader) +{ + BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t ConnectionRequest; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConnectionRequest, sizeof(ConnectionRequest)); + + Pipe_ClearIN(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Connection Request"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- PSM: 0x%04X", ConnectionRequest.PSM); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel); + + /* Try to retrieve the existing channel's information structure if it exists */ + Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER); + + /* If an existing channel item with the correct remote channel number was not found, find a free channel entry */ + if (ChannelData == NULL) + { + /* Look through the channel information list for a free entry */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++) + { + if (Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i].State == Channel_Closed) + { + ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i]; + + /* Set the new channel structure's local channel number to a unique value within the connection orientated + channel address space */ + ChannelData->LocalNumber = (BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET + i); + break; + } + } + } + + uint8_t ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_RESOURCES; + + /* Reset the channel item contents only if a channel entry was found for it */ + if (ChannelData != NULL) + { + /* Check if the user application will allow the connection based on its PSM */ + if (Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(ConnectionRequest.PSM)) + { + ChannelData->RemoteNumber = ConnectionRequest.SourceChannel; + ChannelData->PSM = ConnectionRequest.PSM; + ChannelData->LocalMTU = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU; + ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitConfig; + + ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL; + } + else + { + ChannelStatus = BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_PSM; + } + } + + struct + { + BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader; + BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t ConnectionResponse; + } ResponsePacket; + + /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */ + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE; + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier; + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse); + + /* Fill out the Connection Response in the response packet */ + ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->LocalNumber; + ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber; + ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Result = ChannelStatus; + ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Status = 0x00; + + Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Connection Response"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.Result); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel); +} + +/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Connection Response command. + * + * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header + */ +static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader) +{ + BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t ConnectionResponse; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConnectionResponse, sizeof(ConnectionResponse)); + + Pipe_ClearIN(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Connection Response"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ConnectionResponse.Result); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ConnectionResponse.DestinationChannel); + + /* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */ + Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER); + + /* Only progress if the referenced channel data was found */ + if (ChannelData != NULL) + { + /* Set the channel structure's remote channel number to the channel allocated on the remote device */ + ChannelData->RemoteNumber = ConnectionResponse.SourceChannel; + ChannelData->State = (ConnectionResponse.Result == BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL) ? + Channel_Config_WaitConfig : Channel_Closed; + } +} + +/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Configuration Request command. + * + * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header + */ +static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader) +{ + BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t ConfigurationRequest; + + /* Allocate a buffer large enough to hold the variable number of configuration options in the request */ + uint8_t OptionsLen = (SignalCommandHeader->Length - sizeof(ConfigurationRequest)); + uint8_t Options[OptionsLen]; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConfigurationRequest, sizeof(ConfigurationRequest)); + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&Options, sizeof(Options)); + + Pipe_ClearIN(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + /* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */ + Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Configuration Request"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ConfigurationRequest.DestinationChannel); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Remote MTU: 0x%04X", ChannelData->RemoteMTU); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Options Len: 0x%04X", OptionsLen); + + /* Only look at the channel configuration options if a valid channel entry for the local channel number was found */ + if (ChannelData != NULL) + { + /* Iterate through each option in the configuration request to look for ones which can be processed */ + uint8_t OptionPos = 0; + while (OptionPos < OptionsLen) + { + BT_Config_Option_Header_t* OptionHeader = (BT_Config_Option_Header_t*)&Options[OptionPos]; + void* OptionData = &Options[OptionPos + sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t)]; + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Option Type: 0x%04X", OptionHeader->Type); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Option Length: 0x%04X", (sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t) + OptionHeader->Length)); + + /* Store the remote MTU option's value if present */ + if (OptionHeader->Type == BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU) + ChannelData->RemoteMTU = *((uint16_t*)OptionData); + + /* Progress to the next option in the packet */ + OptionPos += (sizeof(BT_Config_Option_Header_t) + OptionHeader->Length); + } + } + + struct + { + BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader; + BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t ConfigurationResponse; + } ResponsePacket; + + /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */ + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE; + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier; + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse); + + /* Fill out the Configuration Response in the response packet */ + ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber; + ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Flags = 0x00; + ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Result = (ChannelData != NULL) ? BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL : BT_CONFIGURATION_REJECTED; + + Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL); + + if (ChannelData != NULL) + { + switch (ChannelData->State) + { + case Channel_Config_WaitConfig: + ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig; + break; + case Channel_Config_WaitReqResp: + ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitResp; + break; + case Channel_Config_WaitReq: + ChannelData->State = Channel_Open; + break; + } + } + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Configuration Response"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.ConfigurationResponse.Result); +} + +/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Configuration Response command. + * + * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header + */ +static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader) +{ + BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t ConfigurationResponse; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ConfigurationResponse, sizeof(ConfigurationResponse)); + + Pipe_ClearIN(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Configuration Response"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ConfigurationResponse.Result); + + /* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */ + Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(ConfigurationResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER); + + /* Only update the channel's state if it was found in the channel list */ + if (ChannelData != NULL) + { + /* Check if the channel configuration completed successfuly */ + if (ConfigurationResponse.Result == BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL) + { + switch (ChannelData->State) + { + case Channel_Config_WaitReqResp: + ChannelData->State = Channel_Config_WaitReq; + break; + case Channel_Config_WaitResp: + ChannelData->State = Channel_Open; + break; + } + } + else + { + /* Configuration failed - close the channel */ + ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed; + } + } +} + +/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Disconnection Request command. + * + * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header + */ +static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader) +{ + BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t DisconnectionRequest; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DisconnectionRequest, sizeof(DisconnectionRequest)); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Disconnection Request"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionRequest.DestinationChannel); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel); + + Pipe_ClearIN(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + /* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */ + Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DisconnectionRequest.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER); + + struct + { + BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader; + BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t DisconnectionResponse; + } ResponsePacket; + + /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */ + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE; + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier; + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse); + + /* Fill out the Disconnection Response in the response packet */ + ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel = ChannelData->RemoteNumber; + ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel = ChannelData->LocalNumber; + + Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL); + + /* If the channel was found in the channel list, close it */ + if (ChannelData != NULL) + ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed; + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Disconnection Response"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", ResponsePacket.DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel); +} + +/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for a Disconnection Response command. + * + * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header + */ +static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader) +{ + BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t DisconnectionResponse; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DisconnectionResponse, sizeof(DisconnectionResponse)); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Disconnection Response"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Destination Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionResponse.DestinationChannel); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Source Channel: 0x%04X", DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel); + + Pipe_ClearIN(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + /* Search for the referenced channel in the channel information list */ + Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = Bluetooth_GetChannelData(DisconnectionResponse.SourceChannel, CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER); + + /* If the channel was found in the channel list, close it */ + if (ChannelData != NULL) + ChannelData->State = Channel_Closed; +} + +/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for an Echo Request command. + * + * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header + */ +static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader) +{ + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Echo Request"); + + Pipe_ClearIN(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + struct + { + BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader; + } ResponsePacket; + + /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */ + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_RESPONSE; + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier; + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length = 0; + + Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, sizeof(ResponsePacket), NULL); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Echo Response"); +} + +/** Internal Bluetooth stack Signal Command processing routine for an Information Request command. + * + * \param[in] SignalCommandHeader Pointer to the start of the received packet's Signal Command header + */ +static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader) +{ + BT_Signal_InformationReq_t InformationRequest; + + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&InformationRequest, sizeof(InformationRequest)); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, "<< L2CAP Information Request"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Info Type: 0x%04X", InformationRequest.InfoType); + + Pipe_ClearIN(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + struct + { + BT_Signal_Header_t SignalCommandHeader; + BT_Signal_InformationResp_t InformationResponse; + + uint8_t Data[4]; + } ResponsePacket; + + uint8_t DataLen = 0; + + /* Retrieve the requested information and store it in the outgoing packet, if found */ + switch (InformationRequest.InfoType) + { + case BT_INFOREQ_MTU: + ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL; + DataLen = 2; + + *((uint16_t*)&ResponsePacket.Data) = MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU; + break; + case BT_INFOREQ_EXTENDEDFEATURES: + ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL; + DataLen = 4; + + *((uint32_t*)&ResponsePacket.Data) = 0; + break; + default: + ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result = BT_INFORMATION_NOTSUPPORTED; + DataLen = 0; + break; + } + + /* Fill out the Signal Command header in the response packet */ + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Code = BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_RESPONSE; + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Identifier = SignalCommandHeader->Identifier; + ResponsePacket.SignalCommandHeader.Length = sizeof(ResponsePacket.InformationResponse) + DataLen; + + /* Fill out the Information Response in the response packet */ + ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.InfoType = InformationRequest.InfoType; + + Bluetooth_SendPacket(&ResponsePacket, (sizeof(ResponsePacket) - sizeof(ResponsePacket.Data) + DataLen), NULL); + + BT_ACL_DEBUG(1, ">> L2CAP Information Response"); + BT_ACL_DEBUG(2, "-- Result: 0x%02X", ResponsePacket.InformationResponse.Result); +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.h index 1a72cede3..cc0160ff7 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.h +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.h @@ -1,176 +1,176 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_
-#define _BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <avr/io.h>
- #include <string.h>
- #include <stdbool.h>
- #include <stdio.h>
-
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-
- #include "BluetoothStack.h"
-
- /* Macros: */
- #define BT_ACL_DEBUG(l, s, ...) do { if (ACL_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(ACL) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
- #define ACL_DEBUG_LEVEL 0
-
- #define BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET 0x0040
-
- #define BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING 0x0001
- #define BT_CHANNEL_CONNECTIONLESS 0x0002
-
- #define BT_SIGNAL_COMMAND_REJECT 0x01
- #define BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x02
- #define BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE 0x03
- #define BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST 0x04
- #define BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE 0x05
- #define BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST 0x06
- #define BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE 0x07
- #define BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_REQUEST 0x08
- #define BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_RESPONSE 0x09
- #define BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_REQUEST 0x0A
- #define BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_RESPONSE 0x0B
-
- #define BT_INFOREQ_MTU 0x0001
- #define BT_INFOREQ_EXTENDEDFEATURES 0x0002
-
- #define BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL 0x0000
- #define BT_INFORMATION_NOTSUPPORTED 0x0001
-
- #define BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL 0x0000
- #define BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_PSM 0x0002
- #define BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_RESOURCES 0x0004
-
- #define BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL 0x0000
- #define BT_CONFIGURATION_REJECTED 0x0002
- #define BT_CONFIGURATION_UNKNOWNOPTIONS 0x0003
-
- #define BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU 1
-
- #define BT_ACL_FIRST_AUTOFLUSH (1 << 13)
-
- /* Type Defines: */
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t ConnectionHandle;
- uint16_t DataLength;
- } BT_ACL_Header_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t PayloadLength;
- uint16_t DestinationChannel;
- } BT_DataPacket_Header_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t Code;
- uint8_t Identifier;
- uint16_t Length;
- } BT_Signal_Header_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t PSM;
- uint16_t SourceChannel;
- } BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t DestinationChannel;
- uint16_t SourceChannel;
- uint16_t Result;
- uint16_t Status;
- } BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t DestinationChannel;
- uint16_t SourceChannel;
- } BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t DestinationChannel;
- uint16_t SourceChannel;
- } BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t DestinationChannel;
- uint16_t Flags;
- } BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t SourceChannel;
- uint16_t Flags;
- uint16_t Result;
- } BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t InfoType;
- } BT_Signal_InformationReq_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t InfoType;
- uint16_t Result;
- } BT_Signal_InformationResp_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t Type;
- uint8_t Length;
- } BT_Config_Option_Header_t;
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void Bluetooth_ACLTask(void);
-
- #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_C)
- static void Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets(void);
-
- static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
- static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
- static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
- static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
- static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
- static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
- static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
- static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader);
- #endif
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_ +#define _BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <string.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + #include <stdio.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h> + + #include "BluetoothStack.h" + + /* Macros: */ + #define BT_ACL_DEBUG(l, s, ...) do { if (ACL_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(ACL) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0) + #define ACL_DEBUG_LEVEL 0 + + #define BT_CHANNELNUMBER_BASEOFFSET 0x0040 + + #define BT_CHANNEL_SIGNALING 0x0001 + #define BT_CHANNEL_CONNECTIONLESS 0x0002 + + #define BT_SIGNAL_COMMAND_REJECT 0x01 + #define BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x02 + #define BT_SIGNAL_CONNECTION_RESPONSE 0x03 + #define BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_REQUEST 0x04 + #define BT_SIGNAL_CONFIGURATION_RESPONSE 0x05 + #define BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_REQUEST 0x06 + #define BT_SIGNAL_DISCONNECTION_RESPONSE 0x07 + #define BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_REQUEST 0x08 + #define BT_SIGNAL_ECHO_RESPONSE 0x09 + #define BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_REQUEST 0x0A + #define BT_SIGNAL_INFORMATION_RESPONSE 0x0B + + #define BT_INFOREQ_MTU 0x0001 + #define BT_INFOREQ_EXTENDEDFEATURES 0x0002 + + #define BT_INFORMATION_SUCCESSFUL 0x0000 + #define BT_INFORMATION_NOTSUPPORTED 0x0001 + + #define BT_CONNECTION_SUCCESSFUL 0x0000 + #define BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_PSM 0x0002 + #define BT_CONNECTION_REFUSED_RESOURCES 0x0004 + + #define BT_CONFIGURATION_SUCCESSFUL 0x0000 + #define BT_CONFIGURATION_REJECTED 0x0002 + #define BT_CONFIGURATION_UNKNOWNOPTIONS 0x0003 + + #define BT_CONFIG_OPTION_MTU 1 + + #define BT_ACL_FIRST_AUTOFLUSH (1 << 13) + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t ConnectionHandle; + uint16_t DataLength; + } BT_ACL_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t PayloadLength; + uint16_t DestinationChannel; + } BT_DataPacket_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Code; + uint8_t Identifier; + uint16_t Length; + } BT_Signal_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t PSM; + uint16_t SourceChannel; + } BT_Signal_ConnectionReq_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t DestinationChannel; + uint16_t SourceChannel; + uint16_t Result; + uint16_t Status; + } BT_Signal_ConnectionResp_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t DestinationChannel; + uint16_t SourceChannel; + } BT_Signal_DisconnectionReq_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t DestinationChannel; + uint16_t SourceChannel; + } BT_Signal_DisconnectionResp_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t DestinationChannel; + uint16_t Flags; + } BT_Signal_ConfigurationReq_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t SourceChannel; + uint16_t Flags; + uint16_t Result; + } BT_Signal_ConfigurationResp_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t InfoType; + } BT_Signal_InformationReq_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t InfoType; + uint16_t Result; + } BT_Signal_InformationResp_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Type; + uint8_t Length; + } BT_Config_Option_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Bluetooth_ACLTask(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTH_ACLPACKETS_C) + static void Bluetooth_ProcessIncommingACLPackets(void); + + static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader); + static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader); + static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader); + static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_ConfigurationResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader); + static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader); + static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_DisconnectionResp(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader); + static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_EchoReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader); + static inline void Bluetooth_Signal_InformationReq(const BT_Signal_Header_t* const SignalCommandHeader); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothClassCodes.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothClassCodes.h index 17e53c8e8..209256fd0 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothClassCodes.h +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothClassCodes.h @@ -1,110 +1,110 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_CLASS_CODES_H_
-#define _BLUETOOTH_CLASS_CODES_H_
-
- /* Macros: */
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_POSITIONING (1UL << 16)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_NETWORKING (1UL << 17)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_RENDERING (1UL << 18)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_CAPTURING (1UL << 19)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_OBJECTTRANSFER (1UL << 20)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_AUDIO (1UL << 21)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_TELEPHONY (1UL << 22)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_INFORMATION (1UL << 23)
-
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_MISC (0x00 << 8)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_COMPUTER (0x01 << 8)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_PHONE (0x02 << 8)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_LAN (0x03 << 8)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_AUDIOVIDEO (0x04 << 8)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_PERIPHERAL (0x05 << 8)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_IMAGING (0x06 << 8)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_UNCLASSIFIED (0x1F << 8)
-
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_DESKTOP (0x01 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_SERVER (0x02 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_LAPTOP (0x03 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_HANDHELD (0x04 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_PALM (0x05 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_WEARABLE (0x06 << 2)
-
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_CELLULAR (0x01 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_CORDLESS (0x02 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_SMARTPHONE (0x03 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_WIREDMODEM (0x04 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_ISDN (0x05 << 2)
-
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_FULLY_AVAILABLE (0x00 << 5)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_1_TO_17_PC_UTILIZED (0x01 << 5)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_17_TO_33_PC_UTILIZED (0x02 << 5)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_33_TO_50_PC_UTILIZED (0x03 << 5)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_50_TO_67_PC_UTILIZED (0x04 << 5)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_67_TO_83_PC_UTILIZED (0x05 << 5)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_83_TO_99_PC_UTILIZED (0x06 << 5)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_NO_SERVICE_AVAILABLE (0x07 << 5)
-
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HEADSET (0x01 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HANDSFREE (0x02 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_MICROPHONE (0x04 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_LOUDSPEAKER (0x05 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HEADPHONES (0x06 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_PORTABLE_AUDIO (0x07 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_CARAUDIO (0x08 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_SETTOP_BOX (0x09 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HIFI (0x0A << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VCR (0x0B << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_CAMERA (0x0C << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_CAMCORDER (0x0D << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_MONITOR (0x0E << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_DISPLAY_AND_LOUDSPEAKER (0x0F << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_CONFERENCING (0x10 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_GAMING_TOY (0x12 << 2)
-
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_KEYBOARD (0x01 << 6)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_POINTING (0x02 << 6)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_COMBO (0x03 << 6)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_JOYSTICK (0x01 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_GAMEPAD (0x02 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_REMOTE_CONTROL (0x03 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_SENSING_DEVICE (0x04 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_DIGITIZER (0x05 << 2)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_CARD_READER (0x06 << 2)
-
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_DISPLAY (1 << 4)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_CAMERA (1 << 5)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_SCANNER (1 << 6)
- #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_PRINTER (1 << 7)
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_CLASS_CODES_H_ +#define _BLUETOOTH_CLASS_CODES_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_POSITIONING (1UL << 16) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_NETWORKING (1UL << 17) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_RENDERING (1UL << 18) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_CAPTURING (1UL << 19) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_OBJECTTRANSFER (1UL << 20) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_AUDIO (1UL << 21) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_TELEPHONY (1UL << 22) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_SERVICE_INFORMATION (1UL << 23) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_MISC (0x00 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_COMPUTER (0x01 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_PHONE (0x02 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_LAN (0x03 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_AUDIOVIDEO (0x04 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_PERIPHERAL (0x05 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_IMAGING (0x06 << 8) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MAJOR_UNCLASSIFIED (0x1F << 8) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_DESKTOP (0x01 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_SERVER (0x02 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_LAPTOP (0x03 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_HANDHELD (0x04 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_PALM (0x05 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_COMPUTER_WEARABLE (0x06 << 2) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_CELLULAR (0x01 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_CORDLESS (0x02 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_SMARTPHONE (0x03 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_WIREDMODEM (0x04 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PHONE_ISDN (0x05 << 2) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_FULLY_AVAILABLE (0x00 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_1_TO_17_PC_UTILIZED (0x01 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_17_TO_33_PC_UTILIZED (0x02 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_33_TO_50_PC_UTILIZED (0x03 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_50_TO_67_PC_UTILIZED (0x04 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_67_TO_83_PC_UTILIZED (0x05 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_LAN_83_TO_99_PC_UTILIZED (0x06 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_NO_SERVICE_AVAILABLE (0x07 << 5) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HEADSET (0x01 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HANDSFREE (0x02 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_MICROPHONE (0x04 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_LOUDSPEAKER (0x05 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HEADPHONES (0x06 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_PORTABLE_AUDIO (0x07 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_CARAUDIO (0x08 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_SETTOP_BOX (0x09 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_HIFI (0x0A << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VCR (0x0B << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_CAMERA (0x0C << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_CAMCORDER (0x0D << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_MONITOR (0x0E << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_DISPLAY_AND_LOUDSPEAKER (0x0F << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_VIDEO_CONFERENCING (0x10 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_AV_GAMING_TOY (0x12 << 2) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_KEYBOARD (0x01 << 6) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_POINTING (0x02 << 6) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_COMBO (0x03 << 6) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_UNCATEGORIZED (0x00 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_JOYSTICK (0x01 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_GAMEPAD (0x02 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_REMOTE_CONTROL (0x03 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_SENSING_DEVICE (0x04 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_DIGITIZER (0x05 << 2) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_PERIPHERAL_CARD_READER (0x06 << 2) + + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_DISPLAY (1 << 4) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_CAMERA (1 << 5) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_SCANNER (1 << 6) + #define DEVICE_CLASS_MINOR_IMAGING_PRINTER (1 << 7) + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c index 740ce6766..f678ecba5 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c @@ -1,396 +1,396 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-/*
- TODO: Add local to remote device connections
- */
-
-#define INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTHHCICOMMANDS_C
-#include "BluetoothHCICommands.h"
-
-/** Temporary Bluetooth Device Address, for HCI responses which much include the detination address */
-static uint8_t Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress[6];
-
-/** Bluetooth HCI processing task. This task should be called repeatedly the main Bluetooth
- * stack task to manage the HCI processing state.
- */
-void Bluetooth_HCITask(void)
-{
- BT_HCICommand_Header_t HCICommandHeader;
-
- switch (Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState)
- {
- case Bluetooth_ProcessEvents:
- Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE);
- Pipe_Unfreeze();
-
- if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
- {
- BT_HCIEvent_Header_t HCIEventHeader;
-
- /* Read in the event header to fetch the event code and payload length */
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&HCIEventHeader, sizeof(HCIEventHeader));
-
- /* Create a temporary buffer for the event parameters */
- uint8_t EventParams[HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength];
-
- /* Read in the event parameters into the temporary buffer */
- Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&EventParams, HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength);
- Pipe_ClearIN();
-
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "Event Received (0x%02X)", HCIEventHeader.EventCode);
-
- switch (HCIEventHeader.EventCode)
- {
- case EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Complete");
-
- /* Check which operation was completed in case we need to process the even parameters */
- switch (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t*)&EventParams)->Opcode)
- {
- case (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR):
- /* A READ BDADDR command completed, copy over the local device's BDADDR from the response */
- memcpy(Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR,
- &((BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ReturnParams[1],
- sizeof(Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR));
- break;
- }
-
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState;
- break;
- case EVENT_COMMAND_STATUS:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Status");
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Status Code: 0x%02X", (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t*)&EventParams)->Status));
-
- /* If the execution of a command failed, reset the stack */
- if (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t*)&EventParams)->Status)
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init;
- break;
- case EVENT_CONNECTION_REQUEST:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Connection Request");
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Link Type: 0x%02X", (((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->LinkType));
-
- /* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
- memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
- &((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
- sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));
-
- bool IsACLConnection = (((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->LinkType == 0x01);
-
- /* Only accept the connection if it is a ACL (data) connection, a device is not already connected
- and the user application has indicated that the connection should be allowed */
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = (Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected || !(IsACLConnection) ||
- !(Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress))) ?
- Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection : Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection;
-
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection %S", (Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState == Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection) ?
- PSTR("REJECTED") : PSTR("ACCEPTED"));
-
- break;
- case EVENT_PIN_CODE_REQUEST:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Pin Code Request");
-
- /* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
- memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
- &((BT_HCIEvent_PinCodeReq_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
- sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));
-
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode;
- break;
- case EVENT_LINK_KEY_REQUEST:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Link Key Request");
-
- /* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
- memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
- &((BT_HCIEvent_LinkKeyReq_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
- sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));
-
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK;
- break;
- case EVENT_CONNECTION_COMPLETE:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Connection Complete");
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Handle: 0x%04X", ((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ConnectionHandle);
-
- /* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */
- memcpy(Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress,
- &((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress,
- sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress));
-
- /* Store the created connection handle and indicate that the connection has been established */
- Bluetooth_Connection.ConnectionHandle = ((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ConnectionHandle;
- Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected = true;
-
- Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete();
- break;
- case EVENT_DISCONNECTION_COMPLETE:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Disconnection Complete");
-
- /* Device disconnected, indicate connection information no longer valid */
- Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected = false;
-
- Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete();
-
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init;
- break;
- }
- }
-
- Pipe_Freeze();
-
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Init:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Init");
-
- Bluetooth_State.IsInitialized = false;
-
- /* Reset the connection information structure to destroy any previous connection state */
- memset(&Bluetooth_Connection, 0x00, sizeof(Bluetooth_Connection));
-
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_Reset;
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Init_Reset:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Reset");
-
- HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
- {
- OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_RESET),
- ParameterLength: 0,
- };
-
- /* Send the command to reset the bluetooth dongle controller */
- Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0);
-
- Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize;
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Read Buffer Size");
-
- HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
- {
- OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBUFFERSIZE),
- ParameterLength: 0,
- };
-
- /* Send the command to read the bluetooth buffer size (mandatory before device sends any data) */
- Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0);
-
- Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR;
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Get BDADDR");
-
- HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
- {
- OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR),
- ParameterLength: 0,
- };
-
- /* Send the command to retrieve the BDADDR of the inserted bluetooth dongle */
- Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0);
-
- Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName;
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Set Local Name");
-
- HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
- {
- OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_LOCAL_NAME),
- ParameterLength: 248,
- };
-
- /* Send the command to set the bluetooth dongle's name for other devices to see */
- Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Name, strlen(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Name));
-
- Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass;
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Set Device Class");
-
- HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
- {
- OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_CLASS_OF_DEVICE),
- ParameterLength: 3,
- };
-
- /* Send the command to set the class of the device for other devices to see */
- Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Class, 3);
-
- Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable;
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Write Scan Enable");
-
- HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
- {
- OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SCAN_ENABLE),
- ParameterLength: 1,
- };
-
- uint8_t Interval = BT_SCANMODE_InquiryAndPageScans;
-
- /* Send the command to set the remote device scanning mode */
- Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &Interval, 1);
-
- Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit;
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit:
- Bluetooth_State.IsInitialized = true;
-
- /* Fire the user application callback to indicate that the stack is now fully initialized */
- Bluetooth_StackInitialized();
-
- Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Accept Connection");
-
- HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
- {
- OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_ACCEPT_CONNECTION_REQUEST),
- ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t),
- };
-
- /* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Connection Request event, indicate slave
- connection role */
- BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t AcceptConnectionParams;
- memcpy(AcceptConnectionParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress,
- sizeof(AcceptConnectionParams.RemoteAddress));
- AcceptConnectionParams.SlaveRole = true;
-
- /* Send the command to accept the remote connection request */
- Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &AcceptConnectionParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t));
-
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Reject Connection");
-
- HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
- {
- OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REJECT_CONNECTION_REQUEST),
- ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t),
- };
-
- /* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Connection Request event, indicate failure
- to accept the connection due to limited device resources or incorrect device address */
- BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t RejectConnectionParams;
- memcpy(RejectConnectionParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(RejectConnectionParams.RemoteAddress));
- RejectConnectionParams.Reason = Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected ? ERROR_LIMITED_RESOURCES : ERROR_UNACCEPTABLE_BDADDR;
-
- /* Send the command to reject the remote connection request */
- Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &RejectConnectionParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t));
-
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Send Pin Code");
-
- HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
- {
- OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_REPLY),
- ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t),
- };
-
- /* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the PIN Code Request event, copy over the
- local PIN authentication code to the response */
- BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t PINCodeRequestParams;
- memcpy(PINCodeRequestParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(PINCodeRequestParams.RemoteAddress));
- PINCodeRequestParams.PINCodeLength = strlen(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode);
- memcpy(PINCodeRequestParams.PINCode, Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode, sizeof(PINCodeRequestParams.PINCode));
-
- /* Send the command to transmit the device's local PIN number for authentication */
- Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &PINCodeRequestParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t));
-
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- break;
- case Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK:
- BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Send Link Key NAK");
-
- HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t)
- {
- OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY),
- ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t),
- };
-
- /* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Link Key Request event */
- BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t LinkKeyNAKParams;
- memcpy(LinkKeyNAKParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(LinkKeyNAKParams.RemoteAddress));
-
- /* Send the command to transmit the link key NAK to the receiver */
- Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &LinkKeyNAKParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t));
-
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents;
- break;
- }
-}
-
-/** Sends a Bluetooth HCI control command to the attached Bluetooth device.
- *
- * \param[in] HCICommandHeader HCI command header to send to the attached device
- * \param[in] Parameters Pointer to the source of the control parameters (if any)
- * \param[in] ParameterLength Length of the parameters to send in bytes
- *
- * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
- */
-static uint8_t Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(const BT_HCICommand_Header_t* const HCICommandHeader, const void* Parameters, const uint16_t ParameterLength)
-{
- /* Need to reserve the amount of bytes given in the header for the complete payload */
- uint8_t CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + HCICommandHeader->ParameterLength];
-
- USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
- {
- .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_DEVICE),
- .bRequest = 0,
- .wValue = 0,
- .wIndex = 0,
- .wLength = sizeof(CommandBuffer)
- };
-
- /* Copy over the HCI command header to the allocated buffer */
- memcpy(CommandBuffer, HCICommandHeader, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t));
-
- /* Zero out the parameter section of the response so that all padding bytes are known to be zero */
- memset(&CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t)], 0x00, HCICommandHeader->ParameterLength);
-
- /* Copy over the command parameters (if any) to the command buffer - note, the number of actual source parameter bytes
- may differ to those in the header; any difference in length is filled with 0x00 padding bytes */
- memcpy(&CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t)], Parameters, ParameterLength);
-
- Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
- return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(CommandBuffer);
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + TODO: Add local to remote device connections + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTHHCICOMMANDS_C +#include "BluetoothHCICommands.h" + +/** Temporary Bluetooth Device Address, for HCI responses which much include the detination address */ +static uint8_t Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress[6]; + +/** Bluetooth HCI processing task. This task should be called repeatedly the main Bluetooth + * stack task to manage the HCI processing state. + */ +void Bluetooth_HCITask(void) +{ + BT_HCICommand_Header_t HCICommandHeader; + + switch (Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState) + { + case Bluetooth_ProcessEvents: + Pipe_SelectPipe(BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()) + { + BT_HCIEvent_Header_t HCIEventHeader; + + /* Read in the event header to fetch the event code and payload length */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&HCIEventHeader, sizeof(HCIEventHeader)); + + /* Create a temporary buffer for the event parameters */ + uint8_t EventParams[HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength]; + + /* Read in the event parameters into the temporary buffer */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&EventParams, HCIEventHeader.ParameterLength); + Pipe_ClearIN(); + + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "Event Received (0x%02X)", HCIEventHeader.EventCode); + + switch (HCIEventHeader.EventCode) + { + case EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Complete"); + + /* Check which operation was completed in case we need to process the even parameters */ + switch (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t*)&EventParams)->Opcode) + { + case (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR): + /* A READ BDADDR command completed, copy over the local device's BDADDR from the response */ + memcpy(Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR, + &((BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ReturnParams[1], + sizeof(Bluetooth_State.LocalBDADDR)); + break; + } + + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState; + break; + case EVENT_COMMAND_STATUS: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Command Status"); + BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Status Code: 0x%02X", (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t*)&EventParams)->Status)); + + /* If the execution of a command failed, reset the stack */ + if (((BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t*)&EventParams)->Status) + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init; + break; + case EVENT_CONNECTION_REQUEST: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Connection Request"); + BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Link Type: 0x%02X", (((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->LinkType)); + + /* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */ + memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, + &((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress, + sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress)); + + bool IsACLConnection = (((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t*)&EventParams)->LinkType == 0x01); + + /* Only accept the connection if it is a ACL (data) connection, a device is not already connected + and the user application has indicated that the connection should be allowed */ + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = (Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected || !(IsACLConnection) || + !(Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress))) ? + Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection : Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection; + + BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Connection %S", (Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState == Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection) ? + PSTR("REJECTED") : PSTR("ACCEPTED")); + + break; + case EVENT_PIN_CODE_REQUEST: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Pin Code Request"); + + /* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */ + memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, + &((BT_HCIEvent_PinCodeReq_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress, + sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress)); + + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode; + break; + case EVENT_LINK_KEY_REQUEST: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Link Key Request"); + + /* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */ + memcpy(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, + &((BT_HCIEvent_LinkKeyReq_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress, + sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress)); + + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK; + break; + case EVENT_CONNECTION_COMPLETE: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Connection Complete"); + BT_HCI_DEBUG(2, "-- Handle: 0x%04X", ((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ConnectionHandle); + + /* Need to store the remote device's BT address in a temporary buffer for later use */ + memcpy(Bluetooth_Connection.RemoteAddress, + &((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->RemoteAddress, + sizeof(Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress)); + + /* Store the created connection handle and indicate that the connection has been established */ + Bluetooth_Connection.ConnectionHandle = ((BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t*)&EventParams)->ConnectionHandle; + Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected = true; + + Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete(); + break; + case EVENT_DISCONNECTION_COMPLETE: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "<< Disconnection Complete"); + + /* Device disconnected, indicate connection information no longer valid */ + Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected = false; + + Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete(); + + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init; + break; + } + } + + Pipe_Freeze(); + + break; + case Bluetooth_Init: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Init"); + + Bluetooth_State.IsInitialized = false; + + /* Reset the connection information structure to destroy any previous connection state */ + memset(&Bluetooth_Connection, 0x00, sizeof(Bluetooth_Connection)); + + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_Reset; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_Reset: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Reset"); + + HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_RESET), + ParameterLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the command to reset the bluetooth dongle controller */ + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0); + + Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize; + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Read Buffer Size"); + + HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBUFFERSIZE), + ParameterLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the command to read the bluetooth buffer size (mandatory before device sends any data) */ + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0); + + Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR; + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Get BDADDR"); + + HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL | OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR), + ParameterLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the command to retrieve the BDADDR of the inserted bluetooth dongle */ + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, NULL, 0); + + Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName; + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Set Local Name"); + + HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_LOCAL_NAME), + ParameterLength: 248, + }; + + /* Send the command to set the bluetooth dongle's name for other devices to see */ + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Name, strlen(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Name)); + + Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass; + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Set Device Class"); + + HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_CLASS_OF_DEVICE), + ParameterLength: 3, + }; + + /* Send the command to set the class of the device for other devices to see */ + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.Class, 3); + + Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable; + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Write Scan Enable"); + + HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: (OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND | OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SCAN_ENABLE), + ParameterLength: 1, + }; + + uint8_t Interval = BT_SCANMODE_InquiryAndPageScans; + + /* Send the command to set the remote device scanning mode */ + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &Interval, 1); + + Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit; + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit: + Bluetooth_State.IsInitialized = true; + + /* Fire the user application callback to indicate that the stack is now fully initialized */ + Bluetooth_StackInitialized(); + + Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Accept Connection"); + + HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_ACCEPT_CONNECTION_REQUEST), + ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t), + }; + + /* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Connection Request event, indicate slave + connection role */ + BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t AcceptConnectionParams; + memcpy(AcceptConnectionParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, + sizeof(AcceptConnectionParams.RemoteAddress)); + AcceptConnectionParams.SlaveRole = true; + + /* Send the command to accept the remote connection request */ + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &AcceptConnectionParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t)); + + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Reject Connection"); + + HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REJECT_CONNECTION_REQUEST), + ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t), + }; + + /* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Connection Request event, indicate failure + to accept the connection due to limited device resources or incorrect device address */ + BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t RejectConnectionParams; + memcpy(RejectConnectionParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(RejectConnectionParams.RemoteAddress)); + RejectConnectionParams.Reason = Bluetooth_Connection.IsConnected ? ERROR_LIMITED_RESOURCES : ERROR_UNACCEPTABLE_BDADDR; + + /* Send the command to reject the remote connection request */ + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &RejectConnectionParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t)); + + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Send Pin Code"); + + HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_REPLY), + ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t), + }; + + /* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the PIN Code Request event, copy over the + local PIN authentication code to the response */ + BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t PINCodeRequestParams; + memcpy(PINCodeRequestParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(PINCodeRequestParams.RemoteAddress)); + PINCodeRequestParams.PINCodeLength = strlen(Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode); + memcpy(PINCodeRequestParams.PINCode, Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration.PINCode, sizeof(PINCodeRequestParams.PINCode)); + + /* Send the command to transmit the device's local PIN number for authentication */ + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &PINCodeRequestParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t)); + + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + case Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK: + BT_HCI_DEBUG(1, "# Send Link Key NAK"); + + HCICommandHeader = (BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + { + OpCode: (OGF_LINK_CONTROL | OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY), + ParameterLength: sizeof(BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t), + }; + + /* Copy over the temporary BT device address saved from the Link Key Request event */ + BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t LinkKeyNAKParams; + memcpy(LinkKeyNAKParams.RemoteAddress, Bluetooth_TempDeviceAddress, sizeof(LinkKeyNAKParams.RemoteAddress)); + + /* Send the command to transmit the link key NAK to the receiver */ + Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(&HCICommandHeader, &LinkKeyNAKParams, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t)); + + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_ProcessEvents; + break; + } +} + +/** Sends a Bluetooth HCI control command to the attached Bluetooth device. + * + * \param[in] HCICommandHeader HCI command header to send to the attached device + * \param[in] Parameters Pointer to the source of the control parameters (if any) + * \param[in] ParameterLength Length of the parameters to send in bytes + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum. + */ +static uint8_t Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(const BT_HCICommand_Header_t* const HCICommandHeader, const void* Parameters, const uint16_t ParameterLength) +{ + /* Need to reserve the amount of bytes given in the header for the complete payload */ + uint8_t CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t) + HCICommandHeader->ParameterLength]; + + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = 0, + .wValue = 0, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = sizeof(CommandBuffer) + }; + + /* Copy over the HCI command header to the allocated buffer */ + memcpy(CommandBuffer, HCICommandHeader, sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t)); + + /* Zero out the parameter section of the response so that all padding bytes are known to be zero */ + memset(&CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t)], 0x00, HCICommandHeader->ParameterLength); + + /* Copy over the command parameters (if any) to the command buffer - note, the number of actual source parameter bytes + may differ to those in the header; any difference in length is filled with 0x00 padding bytes */ + memcpy(&CommandBuffer[sizeof(BT_HCICommand_Header_t)], Parameters, ParameterLength); + + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(CommandBuffer); +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.h index 6682619b3..5f98e34a9 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.h +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.h @@ -1,206 +1,206 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_HCICOMMANDS_H_
-#define _BLUETOOTH_HCICOMMANDS_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <avr/io.h>
- #include <string.h>
- #include <stdbool.h>
- #include <stdio.h>
-
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-
- #include "BluetoothStack.h"
- #include "BluetoothClassCodes.h"
-
- /* Macros: */
- #define BT_HCI_DEBUG(l, s, ...) do { if (HCI_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(HCI) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
- #define HCI_DEBUG_LEVEL 0
-
- #define OGF_LINK_CONTROL (0x01 << 10)
- #define OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND (0x03 << 10)
- #define OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL (0x04 << 10)
-
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_INQUIRY 0x0001
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_INQUIRY_CANCEL 0x0002
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PERIODIC_INQUIRY 0x0003
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_EXIT_PERIODIC_INQUIRY 0x0004
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CREATE_CONNECTION 0x0005
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_DISCONNECT 0x0006
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CREATE_CONNECTION_CANCEL 0x0008
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_ACCEPT_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x0009
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REJECT_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x000A
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_REPLY 0x000B
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY 0x000C
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_REPLY 0x000D
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY 0x000E
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CHANGE_CONNECTION_PACKET_TYPE 0x000F
- #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REMOTE_NAME_REQUEST 0x0019
- #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_SET_EVENT_MASK 0x0001
- #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_RESET 0x0003
- #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_PIN_TYPE 0x000A
- #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_LOCAL_NAME 0x0013
- #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_READ_LOCAL_NAME 0x0014
- #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SCAN_ENABLE 0x001A
- #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_CLASS_OF_DEVICE 0x0024
- #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SIMPLE_PAIRING_MODE 0x0056
- #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE 0x0020
- #define OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBUFFERSIZE 0x0005
- #define OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR 0x0009
-
- #define EVENT_COMMAND_STATUS 0x0F
- #define EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE 0x0E
- #define EVENT_CONNECTION_COMPLETE 0x03
- #define EVENT_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x04
- #define EVENT_DISCONNECTION_COMPLETE 0x05
- #define EVENT_REMOTE_NAME_REQUEST_COMPLETE 0x07
- #define EVENT_PIN_CODE_REQUEST 0x16
- #define EVENT_LINK_KEY_REQUEST 0x17
-
- #define ERROR_LIMITED_RESOURCES 0x0D
- #define ERROR_UNACCEPTABLE_BDADDR 0x0F
-
- /* Type Defines: */
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t OpCode;
- uint8_t ParameterLength;
- uint8_t Parameters[];
- } BT_HCICommand_Header_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t EventCode;
- uint8_t ParameterLength;
- } BT_HCIEvent_Header_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t Status;
- uint8_t Packets;
- uint16_t OpCode;
- } BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t HCIPacketsAllowable;
- uint16_t Opcode;
- uint8_t ReturnParams[];
- } BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t RemoteAddress[6];
- uint8_t ClassOfDevice_Service;
- uint16_t ClassOfDevice_MajorMinor;
- uint8_t LinkType;
- } BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t Status;
- uint16_t ConnectionHandle;
- uint8_t RemoteAddress[6];
- uint8_t LinkType;
- uint8_t EncryptionEnabled;
- } BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t RemoteAddress[6];
- } BT_HCIEvent_PinCodeReq_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t RemoteAddress[6];
- } BT_HCIEvent_LinkKeyReq_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t RemoteAddress[6];
- } BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t RemoteAddress[6];
- uint8_t PINCodeLength;
- char PINCode[16];
- } BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t RemoteAddress[6];
- uint8_t SlaveRole;
- } BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t RemoteAddress[6];
- uint8_t Reason;
- } BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t;
-
- /* Enums: */
- enum BT_ScanEnable_Modes_t
- {
- BT_SCANMODE_NoScansEnabled = 0,
- BT_SCANMODE_InquiryScanOnly = 1,
- BT_SCANMODE_PageScanOnly = 2,
- BT_SCANMODE_InquiryAndPageScans = 3,
- };
-
- enum BT_HCIStates_t
- {
- Bluetooth_ProcessEvents = 0,
- Bluetooth_Init = 1,
- Bluetooth_Init_Reset = 2,
- Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize = 3,
- Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR = 4,
- Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName = 5,
- Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass = 6,
- Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable = 7,
- Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit = 8,
- Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection = 9,
- Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection = 10,
- Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode = 11,
- Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK = 12,
- };
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void Bluetooth_HCITask(void);
-
- #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTHHCICOMMANDS_C)
- static uint8_t Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(const BT_HCICommand_Header_t* const HCICommandHeader, const void* Parameters,
- const uint16_t ParameterLength);
- #endif
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_HCICOMMANDS_H_ +#define _BLUETOOTH_HCICOMMANDS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <string.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + #include <stdio.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h> + + #include "BluetoothStack.h" + #include "BluetoothClassCodes.h" + + /* Macros: */ + #define BT_HCI_DEBUG(l, s, ...) do { if (HCI_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(HCI) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0) + #define HCI_DEBUG_LEVEL 0 + + #define OGF_LINK_CONTROL (0x01 << 10) + #define OGF_CTRLR_BASEBAND (0x03 << 10) + #define OGF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL (0x04 << 10) + + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_INQUIRY 0x0001 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_INQUIRY_CANCEL 0x0002 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PERIODIC_INQUIRY 0x0003 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_EXIT_PERIODIC_INQUIRY 0x0004 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CREATE_CONNECTION 0x0005 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_DISCONNECT 0x0006 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CREATE_CONNECTION_CANCEL 0x0008 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_ACCEPT_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x0009 + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REJECT_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x000A + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_REPLY 0x000B + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_LINK_KEY_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY 0x000C + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_REPLY 0x000D + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_PIN_CODE_REQUEST_NEG_REPLY 0x000E + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_CHANGE_CONNECTION_PACKET_TYPE 0x000F + #define OCF_LINK_CONTROL_REMOTE_NAME_REQUEST 0x0019 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_SET_EVENT_MASK 0x0001 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_RESET 0x0003 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_PIN_TYPE 0x000A + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_LOCAL_NAME 0x0013 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_READ_LOCAL_NAME 0x0014 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SCAN_ENABLE 0x001A + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_CLASS_OF_DEVICE 0x0024 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_SIMPLE_PAIRING_MODE 0x0056 + #define OCF_CTRLR_BASEBAND_WRITE_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE 0x0020 + #define OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBUFFERSIZE 0x0005 + #define OCF_CTRLR_INFORMATIONAL_READBDADDR 0x0009 + + #define EVENT_COMMAND_STATUS 0x0F + #define EVENT_COMMAND_COMPLETE 0x0E + #define EVENT_CONNECTION_COMPLETE 0x03 + #define EVENT_CONNECTION_REQUEST 0x04 + #define EVENT_DISCONNECTION_COMPLETE 0x05 + #define EVENT_REMOTE_NAME_REQUEST_COMPLETE 0x07 + #define EVENT_PIN_CODE_REQUEST 0x16 + #define EVENT_LINK_KEY_REQUEST 0x17 + + #define ERROR_LIMITED_RESOURCES 0x0D + #define ERROR_UNACCEPTABLE_BDADDR 0x0F + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t OpCode; + uint8_t ParameterLength; + uint8_t Parameters[]; + } BT_HCICommand_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t EventCode; + uint8_t ParameterLength; + } BT_HCIEvent_Header_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Status; + uint8_t Packets; + uint16_t OpCode; + } BT_HCIEvent_CommandStatus_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t HCIPacketsAllowable; + uint16_t Opcode; + uint8_t ReturnParams[]; + } BT_HCIEvent_CommandComplete_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + uint8_t ClassOfDevice_Service; + uint16_t ClassOfDevice_MajorMinor; + uint8_t LinkType; + } BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionRequest_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Status; + uint16_t ConnectionHandle; + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + uint8_t LinkType; + uint8_t EncryptionEnabled; + } BT_HCIEvent_ConnectionComplete_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + } BT_HCIEvent_PinCodeReq_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + } BT_HCIEvent_LinkKeyReq_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + } BT_HCICommand_LinkKeyNAKResp_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + uint8_t PINCodeLength; + char PINCode[16]; + } BT_HCICommand_PinCodeResp_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + uint8_t SlaveRole; + } BT_HCICommand_AcceptConnectionReq_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; + uint8_t Reason; + } BT_HCICommand_RejectConnectionReq_t; + + /* Enums: */ + enum BT_ScanEnable_Modes_t + { + BT_SCANMODE_NoScansEnabled = 0, + BT_SCANMODE_InquiryScanOnly = 1, + BT_SCANMODE_PageScanOnly = 2, + BT_SCANMODE_InquiryAndPageScans = 3, + }; + + enum BT_HCIStates_t + { + Bluetooth_ProcessEvents = 0, + Bluetooth_Init = 1, + Bluetooth_Init_Reset = 2, + Bluetooth_Init_ReadBufferSize = 3, + Bluetooth_Init_GetBDADDR = 4, + Bluetooth_Init_SetLocalName = 5, + Bluetooth_Init_SetDeviceClass = 6, + Bluetooth_Init_WriteScanEnable = 7, + Bluetooth_Init_FinalizeInit = 8, + Bluetooth_Conn_AcceptConnection = 9, + Bluetooth_Conn_RejectConnection = 10, + Bluetooth_Conn_SendPINCode = 11, + Bluetooth_Conn_SendLinkKeyNAK = 12, + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Bluetooth_HCITask(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BLUETOOTHHCICOMMANDS_C) + static uint8_t Bluetooth_SendHCICommand(const BT_HCICommand_Header_t* const HCICommandHeader, const void* Parameters, + const uint16_t ParameterLength); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.c index 6b434ba43..542a783c9 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.c +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.c @@ -1,99 +1,99 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#include "BluetoothStack.h"
-
-/** Bluetooth device connection information structure. Once connected to a remote device, this structure tracks the
- * connection state of the individual L2CAP channels.
- */
-Bluetooth_Connection_t Bluetooth_Connection = { IsConnected: false };
-
-/** Bluetooth device state information structure. This structure contains details on the current Bluetooth stack
- * state.
- */
-Bluetooth_Stack_State_t Bluetooth_State = { IsInitialized: false };
-
-/** Bluetooth stack initialization function. This function must be called once to initialize the Bluetooth stack,
- * ready for connection to remote devices.
- *
- * \note This function only begins the initialization process; the stack is initialized as the main Bluetooth stack
- * management task is repeatedly called. The initialization process ends when the IsInitialized element of the
- * \ref Bluetooth_State structure becomes true and the \ref Bluetooth_StackInitialized() callback fires.
- */
-void Bluetooth_Stack_Init(void)
-{
- /* Reset the HCI state machine - this will eventually reset the adapter and stack when the Bluetooth stack task is called */
- Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init;
- Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init;
-}
-
-/** Bluetooth stack management task. This task must be repeatedly called to maintain the Bluetooth stack and any connection
- * to remote Bluetooth devices, including both the HCI control layer and the ACL channel layer.
- */
-void Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask(void)
-{
- Bluetooth_HCITask();
- Bluetooth_ACLTask();
-}
-
-/** Retrieves the channel information structure with the given local or remote channel number from the channel list.
- *
- * \param[in] SearchValue Value to search for in the channel structure list
- * \param[in] SearchKey Key to search within the channel structure, a CHANNEL_SEARCH_* mask
- *
- * \return Pointer to the matching channel information structure in the channel table if found, NULL otherwise
- */
-Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_GetChannelData(const uint16_t SearchValue, const uint8_t SearchKey)
-{
- for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++)
- {
- Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i];
-
- bool FoundMatch = false;
-
- switch (SearchKey)
- {
- case CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER:
- FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->LocalNumber);
- break;
- case CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER:
- FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->RemoteNumber);
- break;
- case CHANNEL_SEARCH_PSM:
- FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->PSM);
- break;
- }
-
- if (FoundMatch)
- return ChannelData;
- }
-
- return NULL;
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "BluetoothStack.h" + +/** Bluetooth device connection information structure. Once connected to a remote device, this structure tracks the + * connection state of the individual L2CAP channels. + */ +Bluetooth_Connection_t Bluetooth_Connection = { IsConnected: false }; + +/** Bluetooth device state information structure. This structure contains details on the current Bluetooth stack + * state. + */ +Bluetooth_Stack_State_t Bluetooth_State = { IsInitialized: false }; + +/** Bluetooth stack initialization function. This function must be called once to initialize the Bluetooth stack, + * ready for connection to remote devices. + * + * \note This function only begins the initialization process; the stack is initialized as the main Bluetooth stack + * management task is repeatedly called. The initialization process ends when the IsInitialized element of the + * \ref Bluetooth_State structure becomes true and the \ref Bluetooth_StackInitialized() callback fires. + */ +void Bluetooth_Stack_Init(void) +{ + /* Reset the HCI state machine - this will eventually reset the adapter and stack when the Bluetooth stack task is called */ + Bluetooth_State.CurrentHCIState = Bluetooth_Init; + Bluetooth_State.NextHCIState = Bluetooth_Init; +} + +/** Bluetooth stack management task. This task must be repeatedly called to maintain the Bluetooth stack and any connection + * to remote Bluetooth devices, including both the HCI control layer and the ACL channel layer. + */ +void Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask(void) +{ + Bluetooth_HCITask(); + Bluetooth_ACLTask(); +} + +/** Retrieves the channel information structure with the given local or remote channel number from the channel list. + * + * \param[in] SearchValue Value to search for in the channel structure list + * \param[in] SearchKey Key to search within the channel structure, a CHANNEL_SEARCH_* mask + * + * \return Pointer to the matching channel information structure in the channel table if found, NULL otherwise + */ +Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_GetChannelData(const uint16_t SearchValue, const uint8_t SearchKey) +{ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS; i++) + { + Bluetooth_Channel_t* ChannelData = &Bluetooth_Connection.Channels[i]; + + bool FoundMatch = false; + + switch (SearchKey) + { + case CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER: + FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->LocalNumber); + break; + case CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER: + FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->RemoteNumber); + break; + case CHANNEL_SEARCH_PSM: + FoundMatch = (SearchValue == ChannelData->PSM); + break; + } + + if (FoundMatch) + return ChannelData; + } + + return NULL; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.h index aebdd96e2..ff1dec749 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.h +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/BluetoothStack.h @@ -1,161 +1,161 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_STACK_
-#define _BLUETOOTH_STACK_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
-
- /* Macros: */
- #define BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE 1
- #define BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE 2
- #define BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE 3
-
- #define BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS 6
-
- #define CHANNEL_PSM_SDP 0x0001
- #define CHANNEL_PSM_UDP 0x0002
- #define CHANNEL_PSM_RFCOMM 0x0003
- #define CHANNEL_PSM_TCP 0x0004
- #define CHANNEL_PSM_IP 0x0009
- #define CHANNEL_PSM_FTP 0x000A
- #define CHANNEL_PSM_HTTP 0x000C
- #define CHANNEL_PSM_UPNP 0x0010
- #define CHANNEL_PSM_HIDP 0x0011
-
- #define CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER 0
- #define CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER 1
- #define CHANNEL_SEARCH_PSM 2
-
- #define MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU 255
-
- /* Enums: */
- /** Enum for the possible states for a bluetooth ACL channel. */
- enum BT_ChannelStates_t
- {
- Channel_Closed = 0, /**< Channel is closed and inactive. No data may be sent or received. */
- Channel_WaitConnect = 1, /**< A connection request has been received, but a response has not been sent. */
- Channel_WaitConnectRsp = 2, /**< A connection request has been sent, but a response has not been received. */
- Channel_Config_WaitConfig = 3, /**< Channel has been connected, but not yet configured on either end. */
- Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig = 4, /**< Channel configuration has been received and accepted, but not yet sent. */
- Channel_Config_WaitReqResp = 5, /**< Channel configuration has been sent but not responded to, and a configuration
- request from the remote end has not yet been received. */
- Channel_Config_WaitResp = 6, /**< Channel configuration has been sent but not accepted, but a configuration request
- from the remote end has been accepted. */
- Channel_Config_WaitReq = 7, /**< Channel configuration has been sent and accepted, but a configuration request
- from the remote end has not yet been accepted. */
- Channel_Open = 8, /**< Channel is open and ready to send or receive data */
- Channel_WaitDisconnect = 9, /**< A disconnection request has been sent, but not yet acknowledged. */
- };
-
- /** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref Bluetooth_SendPacket() function. */
- enum BT_SendPacket_ErrorCodes_t
- {
- BT_SENDPACKET_NoError = 0, /**< The packet was sent sucessfully. */
- BT_SENDPACKET_NotConnected = 1, /**< The bluetooth stack is not currently connected to a remote device. */
- BT_SENDPACKET_ChannelNotOpen = 2, /**< The given channel is not currently in the Open state. */
- };
-
- /* Type Defines: */
- /** Type define for a Bluetooth ACL channel information structure. This structure contains all the relevent
- * information on an ACL channel for data transmission and reception by the stack.
- */
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t State;
- uint16_t LocalNumber;
- uint16_t RemoteNumber;
- uint16_t PSM;
- uint16_t LocalMTU;
- uint16_t RemoteMTU;
- } Bluetooth_Channel_t;
-
- /** Type define for a Bluetooth device connection information structure. This structure contains all the
- * information needed to maintain a connection to a remote Bluetooth device via the Bluetooth stack.
- */
- typedef struct
- {
- bool IsConnected; /**< Indicates if the stack is currently connected to a remote device - if this value is
- * false, the remaining elements are invalid.
- */
- uint16_t ConnectionHandle; /**< Connection handle to the remote device, used internally in the stack. */
- uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; /**< Bluetooth device address of the attached remote device. */
- Bluetooth_Channel_t Channels[BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS]; /**< Channel information structures for the connection. */
- uint8_t SignallingIdentifier; /**< Next Signalling Channel unique command sequence identifier. */
- } Bluetooth_Connection_t;
-
- /** Local Bluetooth device information structure, for the defining of local device characteristics for the Bluetooth stack. */
- typedef struct
- {
- uint32_t Class; /**< Class of the local device, a mask of DEVICE_CLASS_* masks. */
- char PINCode[16]; /**< Pin code required to send or receive in order to authenticate with a remote device. */
- char Name[]; /**< Name of the local bluetooth device, up to 248 characters. */
- } Bluetooth_Device_t;
-
- /** Bluetooth stack state information structure, for the containment of the Bluetooth stack state. The values in
- * this structure are set by the Bluetooth stack internally, and should all be treated as read only by the user
- * application.
- */
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t CurrentHCIState; /**< Current HCI state machine state. */
- uint8_t NextHCIState; /**< Next HCI state machine state to progress to once the currently issued command completes. */
- bool IsInitialized; /**< Indicates if the Bluetooth stack is currently initialized and ready for connections
- * to or from a remote Bluetooth device.
- */
- uint8_t LocalBDADDR[6]; /**< Local bluetooth adapter's BDADDR, valid when the stack is fully initialized. */
- } Bluetooth_Stack_State_t;
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include "BluetoothHCICommands.h"
- #include "BluetoothACLPackets.h"
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void Bluetooth_Stack_Init(void);
- void Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask(void);
-
- void Bluetooth_StackInitialized(void);
- bool Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(const uint8_t* RemoteAddress);
- void Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete(void);
- void Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete(void);
- bool Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(const uint16_t PSM);
- void Bluetooth_PacketReceived(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel);
- Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_GetChannelData(const uint16_t SearchValue, const uint8_t SearchKey);
- Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_OpenChannel(const uint16_t PSM);
- void Bluetooth_CloseChannel(Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel);
- uint8_t Bluetooth_SendPacket(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel);
-
- /* External Variables: */
- extern Bluetooth_Device_t Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration;
- extern Bluetooth_Connection_t Bluetooth_Connection;
- extern Bluetooth_Stack_State_t Bluetooth_State;
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _BLUETOOTH_STACK_ +#define _BLUETOOTH_STACK_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Macros: */ + #define BLUETOOTH_DATA_IN_PIPE 1 + #define BLUETOOTH_DATA_OUT_PIPE 2 + #define BLUETOOTH_EVENTS_PIPE 3 + + #define BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS 6 + + #define CHANNEL_PSM_SDP 0x0001 + #define CHANNEL_PSM_UDP 0x0002 + #define CHANNEL_PSM_RFCOMM 0x0003 + #define CHANNEL_PSM_TCP 0x0004 + #define CHANNEL_PSM_IP 0x0009 + #define CHANNEL_PSM_FTP 0x000A + #define CHANNEL_PSM_HTTP 0x000C + #define CHANNEL_PSM_UPNP 0x0010 + #define CHANNEL_PSM_HIDP 0x0011 + + #define CHANNEL_SEARCH_LOCALNUMBER 0 + #define CHANNEL_SEARCH_REMOTENUMBER 1 + #define CHANNEL_SEARCH_PSM 2 + + #define MAXIMUM_CHANNEL_MTU 255 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible states for a bluetooth ACL channel. */ + enum BT_ChannelStates_t + { + Channel_Closed = 0, /**< Channel is closed and inactive. No data may be sent or received. */ + Channel_WaitConnect = 1, /**< A connection request has been received, but a response has not been sent. */ + Channel_WaitConnectRsp = 2, /**< A connection request has been sent, but a response has not been received. */ + Channel_Config_WaitConfig = 3, /**< Channel has been connected, but not yet configured on either end. */ + Channel_Config_WaitSendConfig = 4, /**< Channel configuration has been received and accepted, but not yet sent. */ + Channel_Config_WaitReqResp = 5, /**< Channel configuration has been sent but not responded to, and a configuration + request from the remote end has not yet been received. */ + Channel_Config_WaitResp = 6, /**< Channel configuration has been sent but not accepted, but a configuration request + from the remote end has been accepted. */ + Channel_Config_WaitReq = 7, /**< Channel configuration has been sent and accepted, but a configuration request + from the remote end has not yet been accepted. */ + Channel_Open = 8, /**< Channel is open and ready to send or receive data */ + Channel_WaitDisconnect = 9, /**< A disconnection request has been sent, but not yet acknowledged. */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref Bluetooth_SendPacket() function. */ + enum BT_SendPacket_ErrorCodes_t + { + BT_SENDPACKET_NoError = 0, /**< The packet was sent sucessfully. */ + BT_SENDPACKET_NotConnected = 1, /**< The bluetooth stack is not currently connected to a remote device. */ + BT_SENDPACKET_ChannelNotOpen = 2, /**< The given channel is not currently in the Open state. */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a Bluetooth ACL channel information structure. This structure contains all the relevent + * information on an ACL channel for data transmission and reception by the stack. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t State; + uint16_t LocalNumber; + uint16_t RemoteNumber; + uint16_t PSM; + uint16_t LocalMTU; + uint16_t RemoteMTU; + } Bluetooth_Channel_t; + + /** Type define for a Bluetooth device connection information structure. This structure contains all the + * information needed to maintain a connection to a remote Bluetooth device via the Bluetooth stack. + */ + typedef struct + { + bool IsConnected; /**< Indicates if the stack is currently connected to a remote device - if this value is + * false, the remaining elements are invalid. + */ + uint16_t ConnectionHandle; /**< Connection handle to the remote device, used internally in the stack. */ + uint8_t RemoteAddress[6]; /**< Bluetooth device address of the attached remote device. */ + Bluetooth_Channel_t Channels[BLUETOOTH_MAX_OPEN_CHANNELS]; /**< Channel information structures for the connection. */ + uint8_t SignallingIdentifier; /**< Next Signalling Channel unique command sequence identifier. */ + } Bluetooth_Connection_t; + + /** Local Bluetooth device information structure, for the defining of local device characteristics for the Bluetooth stack. */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Class; /**< Class of the local device, a mask of DEVICE_CLASS_* masks. */ + char PINCode[16]; /**< Pin code required to send or receive in order to authenticate with a remote device. */ + char Name[]; /**< Name of the local bluetooth device, up to 248 characters. */ + } Bluetooth_Device_t; + + /** Bluetooth stack state information structure, for the containment of the Bluetooth stack state. The values in + * this structure are set by the Bluetooth stack internally, and should all be treated as read only by the user + * application. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t CurrentHCIState; /**< Current HCI state machine state. */ + uint8_t NextHCIState; /**< Next HCI state machine state to progress to once the currently issued command completes. */ + bool IsInitialized; /**< Indicates if the Bluetooth stack is currently initialized and ready for connections + * to or from a remote Bluetooth device. + */ + uint8_t LocalBDADDR[6]; /**< Local bluetooth adapter's BDADDR, valid when the stack is fully initialized. */ + } Bluetooth_Stack_State_t; + + /* Includes: */ + #include "BluetoothHCICommands.h" + #include "BluetoothACLPackets.h" + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Bluetooth_Stack_Init(void); + void Bluetooth_Stack_USBTask(void); + + void Bluetooth_StackInitialized(void); + bool Bluetooth_ConnectionRequest(const uint8_t* RemoteAddress); + void Bluetooth_ConnectionComplete(void); + void Bluetooth_DisconnectionComplete(void); + bool Bluetooth_ChannelConnectionRequest(const uint16_t PSM); + void Bluetooth_PacketReceived(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel); + Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_GetChannelData(const uint16_t SearchValue, const uint8_t SearchKey); + Bluetooth_Channel_t* Bluetooth_OpenChannel(const uint16_t PSM); + void Bluetooth_CloseChannel(Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel); + uint8_t Bluetooth_SendPacket(void* Data, uint16_t DataLen, Bluetooth_Channel_t* const Channel); + + /* External Variables: */ + extern Bluetooth_Device_t Bluetooth_DeviceConfiguration; + extern Bluetooth_Connection_t Bluetooth_Connection; + extern Bluetooth_Stack_State_t Bluetooth_State; + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c index 6dd3796f4..f79bb4239 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c @@ -1,195 +1,195 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#define INCLUDE_FROM_SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_C
-#include "ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h"
-
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(SDP_Attribute_Name, "SDP");
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(SDP_Attribute_Description, "BT Service Discovery");
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(SDP_Attribute_Availability, SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT, 1, {0xFF});
-const ServiceAttributeTable_t SDP_Attribute_Table[] PROGMEM =
- {
- {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME , .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Name},
- {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION , .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Description},
- {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY, .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Availability},
- SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR
- };
-
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(RFCOMM_Attribute_Name, "RFCOMM");
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(RFCOMM_Attribute_Description, "Virtual Serial");
-SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(RFCOMM_Attribute_Availability, SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT, 1, {0xFF});
-const ServiceAttributeTable_t RFCOMM_Attribute_Table[] PROGMEM =
- {
- {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME , .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Name},
- {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION , .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Description},
- {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY, .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Availability},
- SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR
- };
-
-const ServiceTable_t SDP_Services_Table[] =
- {
- { // 128-bit UUID for the SDP service
- .UUID = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x01, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00},
- .AttributeTable = &SDP_Attribute_Table,
- },
- { // 128-bit UUID for the RFCOMM service
- .UUID = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x03, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00},
- .AttributeTable = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Table,
- },
- };
-
-
-void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(void* Data, Bluetooth_Channel_t* Channel)
-{
- SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader = (SDP_PDUHeader_t*)Data;
- SDPHeader->ParameterLength = SwapEndian_16(SDPHeader->ParameterLength);
-
- BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "SDP Packet Received");
- BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- PDU ID: 0x%02X", SDPHeader->PDU);
- BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Param Length: 0x%04X", SDPHeader->ParameterLength);
-
- switch (SDPHeader->PDU)
- {
- case SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHREQUEST:
- ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDPHeader);
- break;
- case SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTEREQUEST:
- ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDPHeader);
- break;
- case SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTEREQUEST:
- ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDPHeader);
- break;
- }
-}
-
-static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader)
-{
- BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Search");
-}
-
-static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader)
-{
- BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Attribute");
-}
-
-static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader)
-{
- void* CurrentParameter = ((void*)SDPHeader + sizeof(SDP_PDUHeader_t));
-
- BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Search Attribute");
-
- uint8_t ElementHeaderSize;
-
- uint16_t ServicePatternLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
- BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Total UUID Length: 0x%04X", ServicePatternLength);
- while (ServicePatternLength)
- {
- uint8_t UUIDLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
- uint8_t UUID[16] = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00};
-
- if (UUIDLength <= 32)
- memcpy(&UUID[sizeof(UUID) - sizeof(uint32_t)], CurrentParameter, UUIDLength);
- else
- memcpy(UUID, CurrentParameter, UUIDLength);
-
- CurrentParameter += UUIDLength;
-
- BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- UUID (%d): 0x%02X%02X%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X",
- UUIDLength,
- UUID[15], UUID[14], UUID[13], UUID[12], UUID[11], UUID[10], UUID[9], UUID[8],
- UUID[7], UUID[6], UUID[5], UUID[4], UUID[3], UUID[2], UUID[1], UUID[0]);
-
- ServicePatternLength -= (UUIDLength + ElementHeaderSize);
- }
-
- uint16_t MaxAttributeSize = ServiceDiscovery_Read16BitParameter(&CurrentParameter);
- BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Max Return Attribute Bytes: 0x%04X", MaxAttributeSize);
-
- uint16_t AttributeIDListLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
- BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Total Attribute Length: 0x%04X", AttributeIDListLength);
- while (AttributeIDListLength)
- {
- uint8_t AttributeLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize);
- uint32_t Attribute = 0;
-
- memcpy(&Attribute, CurrentParameter, AttributeLength);
- CurrentParameter += AttributeLength;
-
- BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Attribute(%d): 0x%08lX", AttributeLength, Attribute);
-
- AttributeIDListLength -= (AttributeLength + ElementHeaderSize);
- }
-}
-
-static uint32_t ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(void** DataElementHeader, uint8_t* ElementHeaderSize)
-{
- uint8_t SizeIndex = (*((uint8_t*)*DataElementHeader) & 0x07);
- *DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint8_t);
-
- *ElementHeaderSize = 1;
-
- uint32_t ElementValue;
-
- switch (SizeIndex)
- {
- case 0:
- ElementValue = 1;
- break;
- case 1:
- ElementValue = 2;
- break;
- case 2:
- ElementValue = 4;
- break;
- case 3:
- ElementValue = 8;
- break;
- case 4:
- ElementValue = 16;
- break;
- case 5:
- ElementValue = *((uint8_t*)*DataElementHeader);
- *DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint8_t);
- *ElementHeaderSize = (1 + sizeof(uint8_t));
- break;
- case 6:
- ElementValue = *((uint16_t*)*DataElementHeader);
- *DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint16_t);
- *ElementHeaderSize = (1 + sizeof(uint16_t));
- break;
- default:
- ElementValue = *((uint32_t*)*DataElementHeader);
- *DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint32_t);
- *ElementHeaderSize = (1 + sizeof(uint32_t));
- break;
- }
-
- return ElementValue;
-}
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_C +#include "ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h" + +SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(SDP_Attribute_Name, "SDP"); +SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(SDP_Attribute_Description, "BT Service Discovery"); +SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(SDP_Attribute_Availability, SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT, 1, {0xFF}); +const ServiceAttributeTable_t SDP_Attribute_Table[] PROGMEM = + { + {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME , .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Name}, + {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION , .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Description}, + {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY, .AttributeData = &SDP_Attribute_Availability}, + SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR + }; + +SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(RFCOMM_Attribute_Name, "RFCOMM"); +SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(RFCOMM_Attribute_Description, "Virtual Serial"); +SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(RFCOMM_Attribute_Availability, SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT, 1, {0xFF}); +const ServiceAttributeTable_t RFCOMM_Attribute_Table[] PROGMEM = + { + {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME , .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Name}, + {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION , .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Description}, + {.AttributeID = SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY, .AttributeData = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Availability}, + SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR + }; + +const ServiceTable_t SDP_Services_Table[] = + { + { // 128-bit UUID for the SDP service + .UUID = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x01, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00}, + .AttributeTable = &SDP_Attribute_Table, + }, + { // 128-bit UUID for the RFCOMM service + .UUID = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x03, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00}, + .AttributeTable = &RFCOMM_Attribute_Table, + }, + }; + + +void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(void* Data, Bluetooth_Channel_t* Channel) +{ + SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader = (SDP_PDUHeader_t*)Data; + SDPHeader->ParameterLength = SwapEndian_16(SDPHeader->ParameterLength); + + BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "SDP Packet Received"); + BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- PDU ID: 0x%02X", SDPHeader->PDU); + BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Param Length: 0x%04X", SDPHeader->ParameterLength); + + switch (SDPHeader->PDU) + { + case SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHREQUEST: + ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDPHeader); + break; + case SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTEREQUEST: + ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDPHeader); + break; + case SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTEREQUEST: + ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDPHeader); + break; + } +} + +static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader) +{ + BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Search"); +} + +static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader) +{ + BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Attribute"); +} + +static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader) +{ + void* CurrentParameter = ((void*)SDPHeader + sizeof(SDP_PDUHeader_t)); + + BT_SDP_DEBUG(1, "<< Service Search Attribute"); + + uint8_t ElementHeaderSize; + + uint16_t ServicePatternLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize); + BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Total UUID Length: 0x%04X", ServicePatternLength); + while (ServicePatternLength) + { + uint8_t UUIDLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize); + uint8_t UUID[16] = {BASE_96BIT_UUID, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00}; + + if (UUIDLength <= 32) + memcpy(&UUID[sizeof(UUID) - sizeof(uint32_t)], CurrentParameter, UUIDLength); + else + memcpy(UUID, CurrentParameter, UUIDLength); + + CurrentParameter += UUIDLength; + + BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- UUID (%d): 0x%02X%02X%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X-%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X%02X", + UUIDLength, + UUID[15], UUID[14], UUID[13], UUID[12], UUID[11], UUID[10], UUID[9], UUID[8], + UUID[7], UUID[6], UUID[5], UUID[4], UUID[3], UUID[2], UUID[1], UUID[0]); + + ServicePatternLength -= (UUIDLength + ElementHeaderSize); + } + + uint16_t MaxAttributeSize = ServiceDiscovery_Read16BitParameter(&CurrentParameter); + BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Max Return Attribute Bytes: 0x%04X", MaxAttributeSize); + + uint16_t AttributeIDListLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize); + BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Total Attribute Length: 0x%04X", AttributeIDListLength); + while (AttributeIDListLength) + { + uint8_t AttributeLength = ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(&CurrentParameter, &ElementHeaderSize); + uint32_t Attribute = 0; + + memcpy(&Attribute, CurrentParameter, AttributeLength); + CurrentParameter += AttributeLength; + + BT_SDP_DEBUG(2, "-- Attribute(%d): 0x%08lX", AttributeLength, Attribute); + + AttributeIDListLength -= (AttributeLength + ElementHeaderSize); + } +} + +static uint32_t ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(void** DataElementHeader, uint8_t* ElementHeaderSize) +{ + uint8_t SizeIndex = (*((uint8_t*)*DataElementHeader) & 0x07); + *DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint8_t); + + *ElementHeaderSize = 1; + + uint32_t ElementValue; + + switch (SizeIndex) + { + case 0: + ElementValue = 1; + break; + case 1: + ElementValue = 2; + break; + case 2: + ElementValue = 4; + break; + case 3: + ElementValue = 8; + break; + case 4: + ElementValue = 16; + break; + case 5: + ElementValue = *((uint8_t*)*DataElementHeader); + *DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint8_t); + *ElementHeaderSize = (1 + sizeof(uint8_t)); + break; + case 6: + ElementValue = *((uint16_t*)*DataElementHeader); + *DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint16_t); + *ElementHeaderSize = (1 + sizeof(uint16_t)); + break; + default: + ElementValue = *((uint32_t*)*DataElementHeader); + *DataElementHeader += sizeof(uint32_t); + *ElementHeaderSize = (1 + sizeof(uint32_t)); + break; + } + + return ElementValue; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h index fc0abae45..4dc80a8e8 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.h @@ -1,148 +1,148 @@ -/*
- LUFA Library
- Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
-
- dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
- www.fourwalledcubicle.com
-*/
-
-/*
- Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
- software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
- without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
- all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
- permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
- documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
- advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
- software without specific, written prior permission.
-
- The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
- software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
- and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
- special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
- whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
- in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
- arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
- this software.
-*/
-
-#ifndef _SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_H_
-#define _SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_H_
-
- /* Includes: */
- #include <avr/io.h>
- #include <string.h>
- #include <stdbool.h>
- #include <stdio.h>
-
- #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
- #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
-
- #include "BluetoothStack.h"
-
- /* Macros: */
- #define BT_SDP_DEBUG(l, s, ...) do { if (SDP_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(SDP) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
- #define SDP_DEBUG_LEVEL 2
-
- #define SDP_PDU_ERRORRESPONSE 0x01
- #define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHREQUEST 0x02
- #define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHRESPONSE 0x03
- #define SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTEREQUEST 0x04
- #define SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTERESPONSE 0x05
- #define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTEREQUEST 0x06
- #define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTERESPONSE 0x07
-
- #define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME 0x0000
- #define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION 0x0001
- #define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_PROVIDER 0x0002
- #define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY 0x0008
-
- #define SDP_DATATYPE_NIL (0x00 << 3)
- #define SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT (0x01 << 3)
- #define SDP_DATATYPE_SIGNED_INT (0x02 << 3)
- #define SDP_DATATYPE_UUID (0x03 << 3)
- #define SDP_DATATYPE_TEXT (0x04 << 3)
- #define SDP_DATATYPE_BOOLEAN (0x05 << 3)
- #define SDP_DATATYPE_ELEMENT_SEQUENCE (0x06 << 3)
- #define SDP_DATATYPE_ELEMENT_ALTERNATIVE (0x07 << 3)
- #define SDP_DATATYPE_URL (0x08 << 3)
-
- #define BASE_96BIT_UUID 0xFB, 0x34, 0x9B, 0x5F, 0x80, 0x00, 0x00, 0x80, 0x00, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00
-
- #define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(name, string) SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(name, SDP_DATATYPE_TEXT, sizeof(string), string)
- #define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...) const ServiceAttributeData8Bit_t name PROGMEM = \
- {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__}
- #define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_16BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...) const ServiceAttributeData16Bit_t name PROGMEM = \
- {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__}
- #define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_32BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...) const ServiceAttributeData32Bit_t name PROGMEM = \
- {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__}
- #define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR {.AttributeData = NULL}
-
- /* Type Defines: */
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t PDU;
- uint16_t TransactionID;
- uint16_t ParameterLength;
- } SDP_PDUHeader_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint16_t AttributeID;
- const void* AttributeData;
- } ServiceAttributeTable_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t UUID[16];
- const void* AttributeTable;
- } ServiceTable_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t Header;
- uint32_t Size;
- uint8_t Data[];
- } ServiceAttributeData32Bit_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t Header;
- uint16_t Size;
- uint8_t Data[];
- } ServiceAttributeData16Bit_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t Header;
- uint8_t Size;
- uint8_t Data[];
- } ServiceAttributeData8Bit_t;
-
- typedef struct
- {
- uint8_t Header;
- uint8_t Data[];
- } ServiceAttributeData_t;
-
- /* Function Prototypes: */
- void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(void* Data, Bluetooth_Channel_t* Channel);
-
- #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_C)
- static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader);
- static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader);
- static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader);
-
- static inline uint16_t ServiceDiscovery_Read16BitParameter(void** AttributeHeader)
- {
- uint16_t ParamValue = *((uint16_t*)*AttributeHeader);
- *AttributeHeader += sizeof(uint16_t);
- return ParamValue;
- }
-
- static uint32_t ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(void** AttributeHeader, uint8_t* ElementHeaderSize);
- #endif
-
-#endif
+/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_H_ +#define _SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <string.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + #include <stdio.h> + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h> + + #include "BluetoothStack.h" + + /* Macros: */ + #define BT_SDP_DEBUG(l, s, ...) do { if (SDP_DEBUG_LEVEL >= l) printf_P(PSTR("(SDP) " s "\r\n"), ##__VA_ARGS__); } while (0) + #define SDP_DEBUG_LEVEL 2 + + #define SDP_PDU_ERRORRESPONSE 0x01 + #define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHREQUEST 0x02 + #define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHRESPONSE 0x03 + #define SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTEREQUEST 0x04 + #define SDP_PDU_SERVICEATTRIBUTERESPONSE 0x05 + #define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTEREQUEST 0x06 + #define SDP_PDU_SERVICESEARCHATTRIBUTERESPONSE 0x07 + + #define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_NAME 0x0000 + #define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_DESCRIPTION 0x0001 + #define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_PROVIDER 0x0002 + #define SDP_ATTRIBUTE_AVAILABILITY 0x0008 + + #define SDP_DATATYPE_NIL (0x00 << 3) + #define SDP_DATATYPE_UNSIGNED_INT (0x01 << 3) + #define SDP_DATATYPE_SIGNED_INT (0x02 << 3) + #define SDP_DATATYPE_UUID (0x03 << 3) + #define SDP_DATATYPE_TEXT (0x04 << 3) + #define SDP_DATATYPE_BOOLEAN (0x05 << 3) + #define SDP_DATATYPE_ELEMENT_SEQUENCE (0x06 << 3) + #define SDP_DATATYPE_ELEMENT_ALTERNATIVE (0x07 << 3) + #define SDP_DATATYPE_URL (0x08 << 3) + + #define BASE_96BIT_UUID 0xFB, 0x34, 0x9B, 0x5F, 0x80, 0x00, 0x00, 0x80, 0x00, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00 + + #define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TEXT(name, string) SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(name, SDP_DATATYPE_TEXT, sizeof(string), string) + #define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_8BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...) const ServiceAttributeData8Bit_t name PROGMEM = \ + {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__} + #define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_16BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...) const ServiceAttributeData16Bit_t name PROGMEM = \ + {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__} + #define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_32BIT_LEN(name, type, size, ...) const ServiceAttributeData32Bit_t name PROGMEM = \ + {.Header = (type | 5), .Size = size, .Data = __VA_ARGS__} + #define SERVICE_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE_TERMINATOR {.AttributeData = NULL} + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t PDU; + uint16_t TransactionID; + uint16_t ParameterLength; + } SDP_PDUHeader_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t AttributeID; + const void* AttributeData; + } ServiceAttributeTable_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t UUID[16]; + const void* AttributeTable; + } ServiceTable_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Header; + uint32_t Size; + uint8_t Data[]; + } ServiceAttributeData32Bit_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Header; + uint16_t Size; + uint8_t Data[]; + } ServiceAttributeData16Bit_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Header; + uint8_t Size; + uint8_t Data[]; + } ServiceAttributeData8Bit_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Header; + uint8_t Data[]; + } ServiceAttributeData_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessPacket(void* Data, Bluetooth_Channel_t* Channel); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SERVICEDISCOVERYPROTOCOL_C) + static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearch(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader); + static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader); + static void ServiceDiscovery_ProcessServiceSearchAttribute(SDP_PDUHeader_t* SDPHeader); + + static inline uint16_t ServiceDiscovery_Read16BitParameter(void** AttributeHeader) + { + uint16_t ParamValue = *((uint16_t*)*AttributeHeader); + *AttributeHeader += sizeof(uint16_t); + return ParamValue; + } + + static uint32_t ServiceDiscovery_GetDataElementSize(void** AttributeHeader, uint8_t* ElementHeaderSize); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/makefile index 401cbc30b..cd3bc305d 100644 --- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/makefile +++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/BluetoothHost/makefile @@ -1,748 +1,748 @@ -# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
-# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
-#
-# Released to the Public Domain
-#
-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
-# Peter Fleury
-# Tim Henigan
-# Colin O'Flynn
-# Reiner Patommel
-# Markus Pfaff
-# Sander Pool
-# Frederik Rouleau
-# Carlos Lamas
-# Dean Camera
-# Opendous Inc.
-# Denver Gingerich
-#
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# On command line:
-#
-# make all = Make software.
-#
-# make clean = Clean out built project files.
-#
-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
-#
-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
-#
-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
-# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
-#
-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
-# have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
-# have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
-# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
-#
-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
-# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
-#
-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
-# DoxyGen installed)
-#
-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
-# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
-#
-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
-#
-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
-# bug reports to the GCC project.
-#
-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-# MCU name
-MCU = at90usb647
-
-
-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
-# "Board" inside the application directory.
-BOARD = USBKEY
-
-
-# Processor frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
-# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
-# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
-# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
-# Typical values are:
-# F_CPU = 1000000
-# F_CPU = 1843200
-# F_CPU = 2000000
-# F_CPU = 3686400
-# F_CPU = 4000000
-# F_CPU = 7372800
-# F_CPU = 8000000
-# F_CPU = 11059200
-# F_CPU = 14745600
-# F_CPU = 16000000
-# F_CPU = 18432000
-# F_CPU = 20000000
-F_CPU = 8000000
-
-
-# Input clock frequency.
-# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
-# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
-# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
-# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
-# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
-# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
-# source code.
-#
-# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
-# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
-FORMAT = ihex
-
-
-# Target file name (without extension).
-TARGET = BluetoothHost
-
-
-# Object files directory
-# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
-# this an empty or blank macro!
-OBJDIR = .
-
-
-# Path to the LUFA library
-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
-
-
-# LUFA library compile-time options
-LUFA_OPTS = -D USB_HOST_ONLY
-LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
-
-
-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-SRC = $(TARGET).c \
- DeviceDescriptor.c \
- ConfigDescriptor.c \
- Lib/BluetoothStack.c \
- Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c \
- Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c \
- Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
- $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
-
-
-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
-CPPSRC =
-
-
-# List Assembler source files here.
-# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
-# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
-# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
-# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
-# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
-# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
-ASRC =
-
-
-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
-# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
-# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
-OPT = s
-
-
-# Debugging format.
-# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
-# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
-# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
-DEBUG = dwarf-2
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
-
-
-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
-# c89 = "ANSI" C
-# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
-# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
-# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
-CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
-
-
-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
-
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
-# -g*: generate debugging information
-# -O*: optimization level
-# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
-# -Wall...: warning level
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
-CPPFLAGS += -Wall
-CFLAGS += -Wundef
-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
-
-
-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
-# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
-# -adhlns: create listing
-# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
-# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
-# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
-# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
-# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
-# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
-
-
-#---------------- Library Options ----------------
-# Minimalistic printf version
-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
-
-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
-PRINTF_LIB =
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-# Minimalistic scanf version
-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
-
-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
-
-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
-SCANF_LIB =
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
-
-
-MATH_LIB = -lm
-
-
-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
-# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
-# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
-# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
-EXTRALIBDIRS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
-# only used for heap (malloc()).
-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
-
-EXTMEMOPTS =
-
-
-
-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
-# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
-# -Map: create map file
-# --cref: add cross reference to map file
-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
-
-
-
-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
-
-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
-#
-# Type: avrdude -c ?
-# to get a full listing.
-#
-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
-
-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
-
-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
-
-
-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
-# see avrdude manual.
-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
-
-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
-# performed after programming the device.
-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
-
-# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
-# to submit bug reports.
-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
-
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
-
-
-
-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
-
-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
-
-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
-# DEBUG_UI = gdb
-DEBUG_UI = insight
-
-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
-
-# GDB Init Filename.
-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
-
-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
-
-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
-DEBUG_PORT = 4242
-
-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
-# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
-# avarice is running on a different computer.
-DEBUG_HOST = localhost
-
-
-
-#============================================================================
-
-
-# Define programs and commands.
-SHELL = sh
-CC = avr-gcc
-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
-SIZE = avr-size
-AR = avr-ar rcs
-NM = avr-nm
-AVRDUDE = avrdude
-REMOVE = rm -f
-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
-COPY = cp
-WINSHELL = cmd
-
-# Define Messages
-# English
-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
-MSG_END = -------- end --------
-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
-MSG_LINKING = Linking:
-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
-
-
-
-
-# Define all object files.
-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
-
-# Define all listing files.
-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
-
-
-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
-
-
-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
-# Add target processor to flags.
-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
-
-
-
-
-
-# Default target.
-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
-
-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
-build: elf hex eep lss sym
-#build: lib
-
-
-elf: $(TARGET).elf
-hex: $(TARGET).hex
-eep: $(TARGET).eep
-lss: $(TARGET).lss
-sym: $(TARGET).sym
-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
-lib: $(LIBNAME)
-
-
-
-# Eye candy.
-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
-begin:
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
-
-end:
- @echo $(MSG_END)
- @echo
-
-
-# Display size of file.
-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
-
-sizebefore:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-sizeafter:
- @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
- 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
-
-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
- @$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
-
-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
- @echo
- @echo Checking for invalid events...
- @$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
- grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
- @sed -n -e 's/^/ WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
- @if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
-
-showliboptions:
- @echo
- @echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
- @for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
- echo $$i; \
- done
- @echo --------------------------------------
-
-showtarget:
- @echo
- @echo --------- Target Information ---------
- @echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
- @echo Board: $(BOARD)
- @echo Clock: $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
- @echo --------------------------------------
-
-
-# Display compiler version information.
-gccversion :
- @$(CC) --version
-
-
-# Program the device.
-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
-
-flip: $(TARGET).hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
-
-dfu: $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
- batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
-
-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
- dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
-
-
-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
-# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
-# a breakpoint at main().
-gdb-config:
- @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
- @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
- @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-endif
- @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
- @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
- $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
- @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
-
-else
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
- $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
-endif
- @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
-
-
-
-
-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
-
-
-
-coff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
- $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
-
-
-
-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
-%.hex: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
- $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
-
-%.eep: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
- -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
- --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
-
-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
-%.lss: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
- $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
-
-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
-%.sym: %.elf
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
- $(NM) -n $< > $@
-
-
-
-# Create library from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.a: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
- $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
-
-
-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
-%.elf: $(OBJ)
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
- $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
-%.s : %.c
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
-%.s : %.cpp
- $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
- @echo
- @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
- $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
-%.i : %.c
- $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
-
-
-# Target: clean project.
-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
-
-clean_binary:
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
-
-clean_list:
- @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
- $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
- $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
- $(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
- $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
-
-doxygen:
- @echo Generating Project Documentation...
- @doxygen Doxygen.conf
- @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
-
-clean_doxygen:
- rm -rf Documentation
-
-# Create object files directory
-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
-
-
-# Include the dependency files.
--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
-
-
-# Listing of phony targets.
-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions \
-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter \
-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug \
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb647 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU) + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = BluetoothHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../../../.. + + +# LUFA library compile-time options +LUFA_OPTS = -D USB_HOST_ONLY +LUFA_OPTS += -D NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + DeviceDescriptor.c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + Lib/BluetoothStack.c \ + Lib/BluetoothHCICommands.c \ + Lib/BluetoothACLPackets.c \ + Lib/ServiceDiscoveryProtocol.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst: + @$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst + +checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst + @echo + @echo Checking for invalid events... + @$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \ + grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true + @sed -n -e 's/^/ WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp + @if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi + +showliboptions: + @echo + @echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ---- + @for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \ + echo $$i; \ + done + @echo -------------------------------------- + +showtarget: + @echo + @echo --------- Target Information --------- + @echo AVR Model: $(MCU) + @echo Board: $(BOARD) + @echo Clock: $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master + @echo -------------------------------------- + + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions \ +showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter \ +gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug \ clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
\ No newline at end of file |